TimeClock Plus v7 Manual

TimeClock Plus v7 Manual
TimeClock Plus v7 Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Welcome
About TimeClock Plus®
System Requirements
Admin Server
Database Operations
Namespaces
Database Upgrade
System Update
TimeClock Manager
Filters
Employee Filter
Filter Job Code
Hours Menu
Individual Hours
Individual Hours Options
Schedules Tab
Accruals Tab
Group Hours
Group Hours Options
Exception Filter
Period Reports
Report Options
Period Export
Time Sheets
Employee Menu
Employee Profiles
Information Tab
Jobs Tab
Overtime Tab
Hours Tab
Leave Tab
Payroll Tab
Access Tab
Exceptions Tab
Personnel Tab
Custom Fields Tab
Employee Roles
Global Modification
Employee Messaging
Tools Menu
Import
Export
Employee Status
Employee Status Options
Request Manager
Other Tools
Unresolved Punches
Attendance Monitor
Hours Audit Log
Configuration Menu
Users
User Profiles
General Tab
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
2
2
5
5
6
7
7
9
11
12
13
17
17
18
19
19
24
26
26
27
30
33
35
41
43
45
46
46
49
51
55
57
58
61
62
63
66
68
68
72
73
75
76
79
81
84
86
88
88
89
90
92
93
93
95
Employee Access Tab
Job Code Access Tab
Permissions Tab
Passwords Tab
User Roles
Job Codes
General tab
Breaks Tab
Custom Fields Tab
Cost Codes
Cost Code Simple Select
Manage Cost Code Branch
Cost Code Groups
Cost Codes List
Cost Code Tree
Accruals Overview
Company
Close Week
Company Defaults
Global Tab
Manager Tab
Schedule Tab
Client Tab
Custom Fields
Other Configurations
Clock Configuration
Manage Request Templates
Shift Differential Module
Contract First
Automatic Breaks
Holidays
User Options
Company Menu
New Entry
Modules
Include Overtime in Regular Hours
Automated Import
Contract First
Daily Overtime Exemption Module
Employee Contracts
Flexible Time of Day
Floating Pay Period
Forced Overtime
LDAP Authentication Module
Paid Break Limit
Quad Weekly Overtime
Salaried Non-Exempt
Shift Differential Module
Substitute Module
Weighted Overtime
Auto Transfer Schedule Information
TimeClock Scheduler
Schedules Menu
Manage Schedule
Manage Schedule Options
Daily Overall Schedule
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
3
96
98
99
100
101
102
104
105
107
107
107
108
112
115
116
117
126
126
127
127
132
133
134
138
144
144
147
149
152
153
158
161
163
163
163
163
163
168
168
169
171
171
172
172
173
174
174
175
178
179
181
182
182
182
184
185
Weekly Overall Schedule
Manage Recurring Schedule
Manage Schedule Template
Staffing Requirements
Global Scheduler
WebClock
Clock In
Clock Out
Break
Change Job Code
View
View Hours
View Last Punch
View Schedules
View Messages
View Requests
Change Cost Code
Change Job Code
Clocks
Clock Status
General Tab
Clock Settings Tab
Punch Settings Tab
Hardware Extension Configurations
Hardware Extension Data
Badge Processing
Hardware
RDTg Clock Setup
GT-400 Handscanner Device Setup
Legacy Terminals (100/200 Series)
Using a Legacy 100/200 Series Clock Device
Ethernet 100/200 Series Clock Device Setup
Serial 100/200 Series Setup
How To...
Set Up Accruals
Enable Automated Reports
Enable Automatic Breaks
Enable Breaks
Enable Dashboard Templates
Enable Recurring Schedules
Enable Requests
Set Up Shift Differential
Enable Time Sheets
Glossary
Index
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
4
186
188
191
195
197
203
204
205
206
207
208
208
209
210
210
211
212
213
214
214
217
218
219
220
224
224
225
225
228
229
229
231
232
234
234
234
235
236
236
236
237
237
238
239
258
Welcome
Welcome to TimeClock Plus®! This manual is designed to help you navigate your new product. Whether you are a
long-time user that just upgraded or implementing your company's first time and attendance software, this doc
ument is provided to answer any questions you may have.
If you have any questions, please contact our technical support team at (325) 223-9300, visit our live support
chat site, or send an e-mail to [email protected] Support is available Monday through Friday from
7:00 AM to 6:00 PM Central Time, excluding holidays. Support queries sent via e-mail typically receive a reply
within two business days.
TIP: Be sure to include your TimeClock Plus product key and company name when contacting support
via e-mail. Your serial number can be found in the user menu found in the upper right corner of TimeC
lock Manager, or on a slip of paper that ships with your installation media.
After your initial 90 days of support have expired, further support is available on a fee basis. Please contact your
account representative or TimeClock Plus Technical Support for more information.
About TimeClock Plus®
The TimeClock Plus® system is composed of several distinct applications, utilities, and individual features that
come together to provide you with the best possible time and attendance solution.
Software
TimeClock Manager is the heart of TimeClock Plus. It allows users to create and modify employee and job set
tings, manage hours and accruals, run reports, and oversee the majority of the system-wide company settings.
TimeClock Scheduler is a distinct component of the TimeClock Plus system that allows managers to schedule
their employees, oversee staffing requirements, and plan in advance for any break or vacation time.
WebClock is the primary interface for employees to enter in their time. Employees can browse to the site and
clock in, clock out, go on break, view hours, or perform any other necessary tasks.
Clock Hub and Clock Status are used to control any physical clock devices that needs to connect to the TimeC
lock Plus database.
n
Clock Status allows a user to directly manage RDTg clock settings, as well as those of any legacy clocks run
ning from Clock Hubs.
n
Clock Hub connects directly to GT-400 handscanners and legacy 100/200 Series clocks, acts as a gobetween for the clock and database, and is typically installed locally at the clock device's location.
Hardware
Remote Data Terminals (RDTs) are physical clock devices that employees use to perform clock operations, as an
alternative to the WebClock application.
RDTs are available with several different types of employee recognition systems, including a basic numeric keypad
(for the manual entry of an ID number), a barcode or magnetic card swipe, a proximity reader and even biometric
recognition (e.g. fingerprint or hand scan).
n
RDTg devices: These modular devices use Ethernet and DHCP on your local TCP/IP network to connect to
your server directly via a LAN drop, or can connect remotely if you are on a WAN or if your server is access
ible from the outside Internet. RDTg devices do not need a static IP address to operate, although you can
assign one if you wish.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
5
n
GT-400 handscanner devices: These connect directly to your TCP/IP network via a LAN drop. This means
that your placement of the device will not be limited by the availability of a PC. GT-400 handscanners typ
ically require a static IP address on your LAN/WAN.
n
Legacy 100/200 Series Ethernet devices: These devices connect directly to your TCP/IP network via a
LAN drop. This means that your placement of the device will not be limited by the availability of a PC. Eth
ernet RDTs typically require a static IP address on your LAN/WAN.
n
Legacy 100/200 Series Serial devices: These devices connect to a serial port in the back of a single PC or
server.
Biometric devices authenticate an employee for clock in/out by reading a fingerprint or handscan image, depend
ing on the model you select. These devices reduce the problem of "buddy-punching," which has become a com
mon problem in many work environments.
Barcode peripherals are also available as hand-held scanners to be used in conjunction with barcode readerequipped RDTs. These scanners use the 3 of 9 barcode standard, and allow the system to read barcodes from doc
uments (such as work orders) to collect time by work order, sub-task, and so forth.
System Requirements
The TimeClock Plus® system has a specific set of requirements for the best possible installation.
Server Requirements
Minimum
l
Windows Server 2008/2012, 7, or 8
l
400 megahertz (MHz) Pentium
l
512 megabytes (MB) of RAM
l
1 gigabyte (GB) of hard disk space
l
Microsoft .NET 4.0 with Service Pack 1
l
CD/DVD-ROM Drive
Recommended
l
1 GHz Pentium Processor or higher
l
1 gigabyte (GB) or more RAM
l
1024 x 768 high color resolution
l
2 gigabytes (GB) of free hard disk space
SQL Server
l
Microsoft SQL 2012
Client Requirements
Minimum
l
Windows Vista, Server 2008/2012, 7, or 8
l
400 megahertz (MHz) processor
l
512 megabytes (MB) of RAM
l
500 megabytes (MB) of hard disk space
l
1024 x 768 high color resolution
Recommended
l
1 GHz Pentium Processor or higher
l
1 gigabyte (GB) or more RAM
l
Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
6
Admin Server
After installing TimeClock Plus®, you will be taken to a local site on the server called the Admin Server. This will
usually be located at https://localhost:8443/app/admin/index.html#/AdminLogOn, though that may change
depending on port settings used during the install process.
TIP: The Admin Server can only be accessed on the license server (the computer that TimeClock Plus
was installed on).
To log into the Admin Server, enter the Admin Server password created during installation.
TIP: The Admin Server password is created separately from the password for the ADMIN account used
for logging into TimeClock Manager, and can be different.
Once you have logged into the Admin Server, you can perform the following operations:
n
Change database connection settings.
n
Backup and restore the database.
n
Create a new namespace or organization.
n
Upload license files to existing companies.
n
Update TimeClock Plus.
n
Upgrade older TimeClock Plus databases.
Database Operations
The Database Operations menu allows users to determine what SQL server TimeClock Plus® connects to. In addi
tion, databases can be backed up and restored.
Database Connection Settings
Server: This is the connection path to the SQL instance the TimeClock Plus database is located at. It is usually
entered as [server]\[instancename]. By default, the database can be found at (LOCAL)\TIMECLOCKPLUS.
Method: The connection method used. By default, this will use TCP/IP, but Named Pipes and Shared Memory are
also available.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
7
Port: If TCP/IP is selected and your database uses a different SQL port than the default defined when installing
TimeClock Plus, enter that port number here.
Timeout: This setting determines how many seconds TimeClock Plus will take to attempt connecting with the
database.
Authentication Method: Here you select whether or not you plan on using the default TimeClock Plus cre
dentials (created upon installation), or connecting using specified credentials (specified below).
TIP: Unless the SQL instance was created separately from TimeClock Plus, it is best practice to use the
default credentials whenever they work.
Test Connection: This button allows you to test your connection settings to ensure TimeClock Plus can properly
communicate with the database.
Once you have configured and tested your Database Connection Settings, click Save.
Backing Up A Database
TIP: Backups are created on the server where TimeClock Plus is installed. It is STRONGLY
RECOMMENDED that these in turn be backed up elsewhere in case of server failure.
Databases can be backed up locally on the server for easy restoration in case of corruption. To back up a database:
1. Select Backup from the Database Operations menu.
2. Select the Database you'd like to backup from the table.
3. Click on the Backup button.
4. Select the location you'd like to save the backup to, then click Ok.
5. Once the backup has been created, navigate to the location where it was created and confirm that the
.TCP70 backup file was created successfully.
Restoring a Database
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
8
Once a database has been backed up, it can be restored from within Admin Server. To restore a database:
1. Select Restore from the Database Operations menu.
2. Enter the file path for your backup in the Backup file: field.
3. Enter the new name for the database in the Restore as: field.
4. Enter a file name for the new database in the File name: field.
5. Click Verify to validate the contents of the backup.
6. Once the file is verified, click Restore to finish the operation.
Namespaces
The Namespaces menu allows users to create organization and assign licenses to them. Licenses determine what
features of TimeClock Plus® are available to your organization, and can either be validated online or uploaded via
a license file sent with your purchase.
Creating a Company
1. Select Namespaces from the Admin Server menu.
2. Select the namespace you'd like to create a organization on from the list on the left.
TIP: In most cases, your organization will only have one namespace. If this is the case, select
<<NONE>>. Namespaces are only typically used in multi-company environments.
3. Click on the Create Company button.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
9
4. Enter a Company ID, Company Name, and Product Key (if available), then click on the Create button.
5. If a valid license was entered, you can now log into TimeClock Manager as the ADMIN user and begin set
ting up your organization.
Uploading a License File
If you are creating your organization on a server that does not have internet access, you can validate the license by
uploading a license file. The license file contains all the information necessary to create a company. To upload a
license file:
1. Select Namespaces from the Admin Server menu.
2. Select the namespace your organization is on from the list on the left.
3. Select a company with an invalid license, and click on the Upload License button.
4. Click on the Choose File button to locate and select the license file, then click Save.
5. If a valid license was entered, you can now log into TimeClock Manager as the ADMIN user and begin set
ting up your organization.
Deleting a Company
TIP: Please bear in mind that once a company is deleted, it can NOT be recovered. Deletion is per
manent unless you have a backup.
1. Select Namespaces from the Admin Server menu.
2. Highlight the namespace that contains the company you wish to delete.
3. Click on the
icon next to the company ID.
4. In the confirmation window that appears, enter in the company's ADMIN password, and click Delete. This
will permanently delete the company.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
10
Database Upgrade
The Database Upgrade feature allows you to update TimeClock Plus 6.0 or Web Edition 3.0 databases into
TimeClock Plus v7. The old data is copied into a new database, so your old database will remain intact.
BEST PRACTICES: Once you have successfully upgraded a database, back up the old database and
remove it from your system. This will prevent any confusion with employees using the wrong software.
The database can be backed up via Admin Server > Database Operations > Backup.
Upgrading a Database
TIP: Only Professional Edition 6.0 and Web Edition 3.0 databases can be upgraded with the following
method. If you need to upgrade an older database, please contact TimeClock Plus Technical Support at
(325) 223-9300.
1. Select Database Upgrade from the Admin Server menu.
2. Click on the blue Upgrade database to 7.0 button.
3. Enter the database connection info for the existing database, and click Test Connection to ensure the
information is valid. Once the source server has been verified, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
11
4. Enter the database connection info for the SQL instance you would like to host the upgraded database on.
Click Next.
5. Enter a valid License Key for the companies you would like to upgrade, then click Next.
6. Enter an ADMIN password for the companies you would like to upgrade. ADMIN is the equivalent of the
SUPERVISOR user from previous editions of the software.
System Update
System Update allows users to update their installation of TimeClock Plus®. Updates are released periodically as
changes are made to the software. In addition, running an update will install any new features your organization
may have purchased for your license.
BEST PRACTICES: Updating the system will log off all other users currently using the software. Always
back up your database before updating (Admin Server > Database Operations > Connection Set
tings) and run updates at a time when you will cause the least disruption to the workforce.
To update your TimeClock Plus installation, browse to Admin Server > Namespaces, and choose a namespace.
Click on the gray Update button. The update process will begin automatically and may take several minutes.
If you have multiple namespaces, then you will need to perform this action for each namespace listed.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
12
TimeClock Manager
TimeClock Manager is the centerpiece of TimeClock Plus®. Here, you will create and manage your employees,
job codes, and users, as well as edit hours and organization settings.
New Organization Wizard
1. Find the organization you just created in the Select Organization dropdown. Enter ADMIN in the User ID
field and click Log In.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
13
2. Once you log into TimeClock Manager for the first time, you will automatically be taken to the Organ
ization Setup Wizard. The first screen gives you a chance to change the Organization Name. Once you
have decided on a name, click Next.
3. Select the start of your organization's work week. The day your work week starts is important for calculating
overtime and other payroll considerations. Once you have selected the start of your work week, select
Next.
NOTE: This is a very important step that cannot be easily changed; if you do not know when your
work week starts, check with the individual in charge of payroll before continuing.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
14
4. Enter a password for the ADMIN account. It is strongly recommended that this account has a password that
only limited individuals (such as the person in charge of TimeClock Plus and the Network Administrator/IT
staff) will have access to. Other accounts can be created once you have finished creating the company.
Once you have entered and confirmed a password for the Administrator account, select Next.
5. You have finished running the Organization Setup Wizard! The next steps will be to create or import
employees and job codes, create users, and begin having your employees clock in and out. Please see the
relevant sections on how to set-up your company.
Logging into TimeClock Manager
1. On the TimeClock Manager log in screen, find your organization in the Select Organization dropdown
menu.
2. Enter your User ID. This is either the default ADMIN account or one that has been created and assigned to
you.
3. If your account is password-protected, enter it in the Password field.
4. Click on the Log On button to access TimeClock Manager.
Navigating TimeClock Manager
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
15
Once you've logged into TimeClock Manager, you will be greeted with several elements that will assist you in
navigating the application and tracking your employee hours. The primary tools you will use to navigate TimeClock
Manager are:
Basic Information: The top-right corner contains basic information about TimeClock Manager, such as the current
week and the user currently logged in. To log out of TimeClock Manager, select the user's name and click Log
Out.
The Menu Bar: This strip of options, beginning with the Home icon, is the main menu within TimeClock Plus.
Click on any of the sections to view the various sub-menus and features contained within. You can also click the
Home icon at any point to return to the Dashboard.
My Dashboard: My Dashboard allows you to customize the dashboard to show you the information you need as
soon as you log into the app. Widgets can be added and configured by clicking on the Edit button. For more
information, see My Dashboard.
Using the My QuickLinks Menu
The My QuickLinks feature allows you to save a list of features that you commonly use under a menu for easy
access at any point in the software. For example, if you primarily find yourself using the Employee Status and
Group Hours features, you could save them here.
The My QuickLinks menu appears after adding a feature using the following steps:
1. Navigate to the section that feature is located at and select it (for example, to be able to quickly select
Group Hours, you would navigate to Hours, then select Group Hours.)
2. On the feature itself, click on the star icon next to the feature name. Once the star appears in gold, the My
QuickLinks menu will appear in the menu bar. Click on this star again to remove the feature.
3. Select My QuickLinks on the menu bar to view the features you have marked for easy access.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
16
Filters
Most features within TimeClock Plus® allow the use of one or more filters that only display relevant information.
The following section details the three most common filters.
TIP: Most features contain one or more of the following filters. However, regardless of the feature, filters
will serve the same function. For example, Employee Filter will always filter which employees are visible,
whether you are looking at Individual Employees or running a Report.
Employee Filter
The Employee Filter feature allows you to include or exclude employees based on user-selected criteria. The Fil
ter Employee screen can be accessed by clicking the Filter button on several screens within TimeClock Manager.
After clicking on the Filter button, you will see a number of options on the left hand side for filtering employees.
You can navigate between them by clicking on the option's name. The top of the window shows how many
employees meet your criteria and can be refreshed by clicking the Refresh button. You can also see what employ
ees meet your criteria by clicking Preview, save the filter criteria for later by clicking Save as, load previously
saved filters by clicking Load, or reset back to the default criteria by selecting Reset All.
TIP: By default, Exclude suspended and Exclude terminated are always checked in the Employee
Status section, so any employees that are no longer with the company are always hidden from the list.
Uncheck these options to view employees that are suspended or terminated.
Employee Filter Options
To include an option in the filter, place a check next to its name.
Employee Status: This option filters by employee status. You can filter out terminated, suspended, or salaried
employees. By default, terminated and suspended employees are excluded.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
17
Employee ID: This option allows you to either include or exclude employees by their employee ID number. After
activating this option, you can enter the employee ID numbers in the Manual entry field or select them from a
list.
Default Job Code: This option allows you to either include or exclude employees by their default job code. After
you activate this option, you can enter the default job code numbers in the Manual entry field or select them
from a list. Please note that this will only filter employees who have a default job code assigned to them in
Employee Profiles.
Classification: This option allows you to either include or exclude employees by their classification. After activ
ating this option, you can enter the range of numbers in the Manual entry field or select them from the list.
Department: This option allows you to either include or exclude employees by their department. After activating
this option, you can select from a list of your departments.
Manager: This option allows you to either include or exclude employees by the manager assigned to them. After
activating this option, you can select from a list of your managers.
Hire Date:This option allows you to include employees that have a hire date between two selected dates.
Days Employed: This option allows you to include employees that have been working between two selected
amounts of days.
Custom Fields: If you have any Custom Fields set up for employees' profiles, then you can filter with those as
well.
Summary: This section gives a brief summary of the rules you have selected.
Filter Job Code
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
18
The Filter Job Code window allows you to filter information on Employee Status and other screens in TimeC
lock Manager by selecting the job codes you'd like to see.
Filtering by Job Codes
1. Click on the Job Code Filter wherever it appears.
2. Select the job codes you want to see by clicking on them in the list. To select each job code, click on All
(useful if you want to select all and then deselect a few job codes). To clear the list so none of the job
codes are selected, click on Clear.
3. To save the filter you have created, click on Save As and enter a name for your selection. Later, if you want
to apply the filter, click on Load, and the name of the desired filter.
4. Once you have selected the job codes you'd like to see, click Filter to apply your selection.
5. If you wish to disable the job code filter, re-open the Filter window and select Disable.
Hours Menu
The Hours menu is where many users of TimeClock Plus® will be spending the majority of their time. The Hours
menu allows users to:
n
Create, edit, view, approve, and add notes to segments for employees via Individual Hours and Group
Hours.
n
Run reports on your data via Period Reports.
n
Export data for payroll via Period Exports.
n
Add amounts of time to employees via Time Sheets.
TIP: Users will be limited to adding and editing segments to only the employees and job codes they
have access to. If you find yourself needing to edit hours for a different employee or job code, seek out
the individual in charge of the ADMIN account to change your permissions.
Individual Hours
The Individual Hours screen is where you can add, edit, and review employee hours. You can also tie together
segments through breaks, approve segments, and manage missed punches from this screen.
On the left side of the screen, you will see a list where the first 100 employees will appear. Specific employees or
a different range can be set using the Filter button. Employees can also be filtered by typing in a name or number
into the Search bar. Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will revert the list to the previous settings.
The list can also be sorted in several ways in ascending or descending order by clicking the Sort button.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
19
Once you have an employee selected, their employee information should appear in the Hours tab. This tab shows
the employee name, as well as the number of Regular, Overtime 1, Overtime 2, and Leave hours worked. Indi
vidual Hours also features the following controls:
Date Range Picker: The Date Range Boxes allow you to manually enter in a range of dates to view.
Date Range dropdown: This allows you to select from a number of commonly used date ranges (e.g., last month,
week to date, yesterday).
Update: Once a date range has been selected, click on the Update button to see segments from within that time
frame.
Add Segment: This button allows you to add a segment.
Manage Segments: This button provides a drop down of options that allow you to edit, delete, or add breaks to
the selected segment(s).
Manage Exceptions: This button allows you to approve or deny any exceptions on the selected segment(s), as
well as apply approvals to the segment(s).
Exception Filter: This button allows you to access the Exception Filter and limit the segments displayed to those
that meet a set exception criteria.
Job Code Filter: This button allows you to access the Filter Job Code feature and limit segments displayed to
only the selected job codes.
Adding a Segment
1. Click on the Add Segment button to access the Edit Segment window.
2. Enter in a Date and Time in. You can use the calendar to select a date or the clock icon to enter a time as
well as manually entering those numbers.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
20
3. If the employee is currently clocked in, check Individual is clocked in. If the segment has already been
completed, enter a Date and Time out.
4. If this is a time sheet entry, click Time Sheet Entry. This will enable the Hours field and allow you to enter
in a segment length. The Date and Time in will remain as the anchor point of the shift.
5. If the segment is going to be tied to another segment by a break, select the appropriate option in the
Break Type dropdown.
6. Select the job code this segment was worked in the Job Code dropdown.
7. If this segment is going to earn a different rate than the one normally assigned to this employee, enter it in
the Rate box.
8. If the segment was the result of a missed punch, you can signify this by selecting Missed in punch and/or
Missed out punch.
9. If you would like to enter in a note about the segment, do so in the Note field.
10. If your organization uses custom fields for segments worked, these can be edited by clicking on Custom
Editing a Segment
In order to edit a segment already in the system:
1. Click on the segment to highlight it. Then click Manage and Edit to access the Edit Segment window.
2. The Dates and Times in and out can be edited.
3. If the employee is currently clocked in, check Individual is clocked in.
4. If you want to make the segment a time sheet entry, check Time Sheet Entry. This will enable the Hours
field and allow you to enter in a segment length. The Date and Time in will remain as the anchor point of
the shift.
5. If rounding is enabled and you'd like to edit the actual times of the segment, check Edit actual times.
6. If you want to change the break type that is at the end of the segment, select the appropriate option in the
Break Type dropdown.
7. Select the job code this segment was worked in the Job Code dropdown.
8. If this segment is going to earn a different rate than the one normally assigned to this employee, enter it
into the Rate box.
9. If you would like to enter a note in for the segment, do so in the Note field.
10. If the segment includes a missed punch, you can signify this by selecting Missed in punch and/or Missed
out punch.
11. If your organization uses custom fields for your segments, these can be edited by clicking on Custom.
Deleting a Segment
In order to delete a segment already in the system, click on the segment to highlight it. Then click Manage and
Delete. This will bring up a prompt asking you to verify that you want to delete the segment. To delete the seg
ment, click Ok.
Add and View Segment Notes
Brief (100 character or less) notes can be entered when adding and editing segments. These notes can be used to
explain exceptions or edits, or anything otherwise noteworthy about the segment. Notes can also be edited by
clicking on the note icon in the Notes column. To view or add segment notes:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
21
1. Click on the Note icon in the Notes column.
2. In the Manage Work Segment Notes window you will see a list of all notes entered, with the date
entered, the User ID that entered the note, and the text of the note itself.
3. To edit a note, click on the
4. To delete a note, click on the
icon. This will allow you to enter in new text for the note.
icon. This will permanently delete the note.
5. To add a new note, click on the Add button. This will add a new note to the segment.
View Hour Edit History
When hours are edited, it creates an entry in the Hours Audit Log. This allows you to see who edited a segment,
as well as the date the edit occurred and what information was changed. This information can also be viewed
within Individual Hours by right-clicking on a segment and selecting Audit Log. Each edit made to the segment
can be seen on this screen, as well as what information changed between each edit.
Approving Shifts
If any of the approval types are required for your employees, you will be unable to close weeks if you have unap
proved segments. To approve a segment, click on the checkbox under the appropriate header (M for Manager, E
for Employee, and O for Other). To approve all the segments currently displayed for the employee, click on the
appropriate approval column headers.
Once the approval boxes have been checked, you can then click on the blue Apply Approval button to lock the
approvals into the system, or the gray Discard Approval button to clear out the changes.
Approving Exceptions
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
22
TIP: Depending on the employee's settings in the Exceptions tab, you may not be able to close the
week or run reports with unapproved segments.
1. If a segment has an exception, a dot will appear in the Exception column. If a blue dot appears, the seg
ment has one or more exceptions that are tracked for that employee. If the red dot appears, the segment
has one or more segments that will prevent the week from closing until they are rectified or approved, at
which point the blue dot will appear.
2. Select one or more segments with an exception. Right click on the segment(s) or hover over the Manage
button to view the exceptions.
3. To approve exceptions, select the Approve radio button. If the exception would prevent the week from
closing or reports from running with this employee, the red dot in the exception column will become a
blue dot.
Mass Approving Exceptions
All exception types for the displayed range can be approved or unapproved at once by selecting the Resolve
Period button and choosing which exceptions you'd like to approve.
NOTE: Resolving exceptions will resolve ALL exceptions in that time frame, not just the ones visible on
the page.
Toggle Breaks
If an employee forgot to take a break, or if you just want to tie together segments with a break, you can manually
do so.
1. Select the segment you want to enable a break after.
2. Select Manage and click on Toggle Break. This will tie the segment together with the one below it, as
long as the gap between the two is within the maximum break length.
Splitting Segments
Split Segment by Length
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Split seg
ment by length.
2. You can then split a segment up by clicking on the
icon in the wizard that appears.
3. Once the segment has been split, specify a segment length in the Length column, or by specifying a time
for the segment change in each respective field in the Time column.
4. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
Split Segment by Percentage
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Split seg
ment by percentage.
2. You can then split a segment up by clicking on the
icon in the wizard that appears.
3. Once the segment has been split, specify a segment percentage in the Length column, or by specifying a
time for the segment change in each respective field in the Time column.
4. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
Add Break
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Add
break.
2. A window will appear allowing you to specify the time of the break, as well as the break type and length of
the break. You can also specify where any applicable tracked information will go after the split occurs.
3. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
23
Individual Hours Options
The Individual Hours Options window contains options used to change what information is displayed in the
Individual Hours window.
Display
Date format: This option determines how dates are displayed on the Individual Hours screen. You can choose
from the cultural default or have months, days, and years displayed in different orders.
Time format: This option determines the way time is displayed on the report. Time can be set to:
n
Company default: The format chosen when setting up the company.
n
Cultural default: The format chosen by the culture used on the individual's computer.
n
Hours:Minutes: 4:15 for 4:15 PM.
n
Hundredths: 4.25 for 4:15.
n
Military time 1: 1615 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 2: 16:15 for 4:15 PM.
Hour format: This option determines if hours are displayed in minutes (e.g., 8:15 for 8:15 AM) or hundredths
(e.g., 8.25 for 8:15 AM).
NOTE: Regardless of settings for how hours are displayed, they will always be entered as minutes.
Highlight segments that contain breaks: With this option selected, segments that contain breaks will be high
lighted to make them more visible.
Display actual punch times in addition to rounded times: With this option selected, if an employee is set to
have their clock operations rounded, this will also show the actual time that employee performed a clock oper
ation.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
24
Always display actual times: If this is selected, the actual time will always be shown, even if it is the same as the
rounded time.
Ask for confirmation when deleting a segment: With this option selected, when deleting a shift, the user will
be asked if they are sure they want to proceed. As deleting shifts is permanent, it is strongly recommended this be
selected.
Combine rates and shift premiums in the list: With this option selected, the shift premium (if enabled) for
the employee will be included in that employee's rate for a segment as long as that shift has been processed.
Display job code description in the list: This option shows the job code description alongside the job code
number on segments worked.
Display total hours for each day: This option displays the total amount of hours worked in a single day.
Display day of week for each time in/out: This option displays the day next to each date. For example, Tue,
7/30/2013.
Warn if the segment will exceed accrual balance: With this option selected, if entering in a shift will take that
employees accrual balance below zero, a warning will be displayed.
Show the user ID of the user that granted approval: Enabling this option shows the user that approved a
segment. This is helpful if multiple users will be approving employee hours.
Show cost code description in list: With this option enabled, cost code descriptions will display next to seg
ments worked in that particular cost code.
Settings
Default Times: These default times are the default values for when you create a segment. You can customize the
times entered here as well as the default length of a time sheet.
Perform punch rounding on added shift segments: With this option enabled, the rounding settings for your
employees will take effect when a shift is entered through Individual Hours.
Perform break rounding on added shift segments: With this option enabled, the break rounding settings for
your company will take effect when a shift is entered through Individual Hours.
Warnings
Accruals: These radio buttons give you different options for how accrual forecasts will post:
l
l
l
Do not warn if balance will be negative: With this setting enabled, the system will not display any neg
ative accrual balance warnings.
Forecast to current date and warn if balance will be negative: This setting will forecast accruals as of
today's date, and will warn about negative balances accordingly.
Forecast to date of segment and warn if balance will be negative: This setting will forecast accruals
as of the date of the deductive segment entered, and will warn about negative balances accordingly.
Actual time: These radio buttons determine when a user is warned before a segment with actual and rounded
times is edited. Individual Hours can be set to Always change time to edited time, Always keep actual
times, or Always prompt the user to select the change they'd like to make.
Colors
The Colors section allows you to customize how certain segments are displayed. Segments with breaks,
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
25
conflicting segments, and others are highlighted so users can quickly find exceptions. To change a color associated
with an exception, click on the color next to the name.
Row Shading: Row shading allows you to change how alternating rows of information are displayed. If you are
looking at dozens of segments worked, row shading can help you quickly sort out the information on screen. You
can select how rows are shaded and what color is used here.
Schedules Tab
The Schedules Tab allows users to view employee schedules for the selected date range in Individual Hours.
Please note that this is for informational purposes only - employee schedules cannot be edited from this tab.
Accruals Tab
The Accruals Tab allows users to view and edit accrual history for the selected employee. The tab becomes vis
ible after selecting an employee in Individual Hours.
This tab also displays any accrual balance forecasts, to help a user anticipate how the employee's accruals will post
once the week is closed.
Viewing and Editing an Accrual History
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
26
1. On an employee's Accruals Tab, click on the
icon next to the accrual bank you'd like to edit.
2. Select the date range you'd like to view a ledger for in the Manage Accruals window. A date range can
be manually entered, or select a date range from the dropdown menu.
3. To manually add an entry to the accrual ledger, click Add.
4. Select a date and enter in an amount accrued, amount taken, and/or an amount used over the limit. Please
note that the date must be before the actual current date.
5. Enter in a Note for a brief description of the transaction.
6. Click Save to confirm the changes made and exit the Manage Accruals window.
Group Hours
Group Hours allows users to add, edit, and view segments for multiple individuals at the same time. Employee
exceptions (as defined in the Exceptions Tab of Employee Profiles) can also be viewed and approved here.
Below the Group Hours feature name, you will see Sort and Filter buttons. The filter buttons allow you to
determine what employees will be visible when you click Update.
The list can also be sorted in several ways in ascending or descending order by clicking the Sort button.
The information bar contains several buttons that determine what information is available and how it can be
edited:
Date Range Boxes: This allows you to manually enter in a range of dates to view.
Date Range dropdown: This allows you to select from a number of commonly used date ranges (e.g., last month,
week to date, yesterday).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
27
Update: Once a date range has been selected, click the Update button to see segments from within that time
frame.
Add: This button allows you to add hours for several employees at once. For more information, see "Adding seg
ments" below.
Manage: This button allows you to edit the selected segments. For more information, see "Editing segments"
below.
Employee Filter: This button allows you to select which employees will appear when you click Update by using
the Employee Filter feature.
Job Code Filter: This button allows you to select which job codes will return results when you click Update by
using the Filter Job Code feature.
Exception Filter: This button allows you to filter out results to only those that are flagged with a certain exception
by using the Exception Filter feature.
Once you have selected the range and type of segments you'd like to view, click Update.
Adding Segments
1. Click on the Add button.
2. Select the employees you'd like to edit from a filter or from the list. You can use a regular Employee Filter
or use the Work Filter.
Work Filter
The Work Filter allows you to filter employees based on hours worked as well as specific job codes. For example,
if you wanted to only include employees that worked 0:01 to 32:00 hours on the week of October 6th, 2014, you
would fill out those fields on the work filter. Up to two different hour filters can be created as well as a job code fil
ter on the Work Filter screen.
3. Click Next.
4. Create the segment for your employee(s). For more information, see "Adding a Segment" in Individual
Hours.
5. If the segment will repeat across multiple days, select how many days you'd like to include in the Repeat
days dropdown.
6. Click Next.
7. View the summary for the segment(s) you are adding. If you would like to make sure the segments will cre
ate correctly, click Preview. Once you are satisfied with the changes made, click Process.
Editing Segments
Individual segments can be edited from Group Hours. Please note that you can only edit one segment at a time -
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
28
selecting multiple segments will disable the Edit option. For more information, see "Editing a Segment" in Indi
vidual Hours.
Approving Shifts
If any of the approval types are required for your employees, you will be unable to close weeks if you have unap
proved segments. To approve a segment, click on the checkbox under the appropriate header (M for Manager, E
for Employee, and O for Other). To approve all the segments currently displayed for all displayed employees,
click on the appropriate approval column headers.
Once the approval boxes have been checked, you can then click on the blue Apply Approval button to lock the
approvals into the system, or the gray Discard Approval button to clear out the changes.
Approving Exceptions
Exceptions can be approved for multiple employees at the same time within Group Hours. To approve excep
tions:
1. Select one or more segments that you would like to approve.
2. Select Manage Exceptions in the information bar, or right click on the Exceptions column.
3. Under the Exceptions header, you will see all the applicable exceptions for the selected segment(s).
Here, you have the option to approve or unapprove the selected segment(s). If multiple segments have
been selected with different approval states (e.g., some have been approved, some have not), neither
option will be selected.
4. Click the Approve radio button to approve that exception for the selected segment(s).
Mass Approving Exceptions
All exception types for the displayed range can be approved or unapproved at once by selecting the Resolve
Period button and choosing which exceptions you'd like to approve.
NOTE: Resolving exceptions will resolve ALL exceptions in that time frame, not just the ones visible on
the page.
Deleting Segments
Multiple segments can be deleted across multiple employees within Group Hours.
1. Select one or more segments that you would like to delete.
2. Select Manage in the information bar, or right click on the segment(s) to bring up the Manage menu.
3. Select Delete under the Manage
Splitting Segments
Split Segment by Length
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Split seg
ment by length.
2. You can then split a segment up by clicking on the
icon in the wizard that appears.
3. Once the segment has been split, specify a segment length in the Length column, or by specifying a time
for the segment change in each respective field in the Time column.
4. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
Split Segment by Percentage
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Split seg
ment by percentage.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
29
2. You can then split a segment up by clicking on the
icon in the wizard that appears.
3. Once the segment has been split, specify a segment percentage in the Length column, or by specifying a
time for the segment change in each respective field in the Time column.
4. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
Add Break
1. Right click on a segment, or select a segment and click on the Manage Segments button. Select Add
break.
2. A window will appear allowing you to specify the time of the break, as well as the break type and length of
the break. You can also specify where any applicable tracked information will go after the split occurs.
3. Click Save to commit the changes to the database.
Toggle Breaks
If an employee forgot to take a break, or if you just want to tie together segments with a break, you can manually
do so.
1. Select the segment you want to enable a break after.
2. Select Manage and click on Toggle Break. This will tie the segment together with the one below it, as
long as the gap between the two is within the maximum break length.
Group Hours Options
The Group Hours Options determine how information is displayed in Group Hours.
Click on the to expand a section, or click Expand all or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Apply to save the settings, or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Display
Date format: This option determines how dates are displayed. Dates can be set to display:
n
Server Default: This will use the default format that the server uses.
n
Company Default: This will use the default format chosen for the company.
n
Day/Month
n
Day/Month/Year
n
Month/Day
n
Month/Day/Year
Time format: This option determines the way time is displayed in Group Hours. Time can be set to display:
n
Company default: This is the format chosen when setting up the company.
n
Server Default: This is the format used on the server.
n
Server Default Fixed: The same as Server Default, but the fixed format always uses two digits for the hour
(e.g. it will display 09:00 pm instead of 9:00 pm).
n
Hours:Minutes: 4:15 for 4:15 PM.
n
Hundredths: 4.25 for 4:15.
n
Military time 1: 1615 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 2: 16:15 for 4:15 PM.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
30
Hour format: This option determines how segment lengths and other lengths of time are displayed on the
report. Can be set to Hours:Minutes (e.g., 4:15 for four hours and fifteen minutes) or Hours.Hundredths (e.g., 4.25
for four hours and fifteen minutes). Please note that there may be rounding errors when using the Hours.Hun
dredths method. These can be mitigated by extending the amount of decimal places used.
Default Period: This allows you to choose which built in date range is viewed by default whenever you enter
Group Hours. For instance, Open Weeks will show you all data within the open weeks in the system.
Highlight segments that contain breaks: When this option is checked, segments that contain breaks will be
highlighted with the color selected in the Color section below.
Display actual punch times in addition to rounded times: When this option is checked, actual clock oper
ation times will be displayed alongside rounded times if they are different. For example, if the employee clocked
in at 8:03 AM and the time was rounded to 8:00 AM, both times will display. This option also allows you Always
display actual times, which will show the actual times even when they are the same as the rounded times.
Ask for confirmation when deleting a segment: When this option is checked, you will be asked if you are
sure you want to delete a segment. Since deleting a segment cannot be reversed, it is strongly recommended
that you leave this option checked.
Combine rates and shift premiums in the list: When this option is checked, shift premiums will be calculated
and applied to the rate for each segment worked.
Display job code description in the list: When checked, this option will show the full description for each job
code worked. If this is unchecked, it will only display the job code number.
Display total hours for each day: When this option is checked, the total hours worked by an employee will dis
play after the last segment of the day.
Display day of week for each time in/out: When this option is checked, the day of the week (e.g., Monday)
will be displayed next to each time in/out. This is useful for segments that occur when an employee is working
through midnight.
Warn if the segment will exceed accrual balance: When this option is checked, the user will be warned if
time entered into a job that is part of an accrual bank exceeds that bank's balance.
Show the user ID of the user that granted approval: When this option is selected, the user ID (the ID used to
log into Manager) of the user that granted approval for this segment will be displayed.
Show Cost Code Description in list: If job costing is enabled, then the cost code's description will be dis
played in addition to its levels.
Settings
Default Times: These settings determine the default clock in and clock out times for manually created seg
ments. In addition, the Default time sheet hours (the amount of time entered by default for a time sheet entry)
can be edited here.
Rounding: By default, added segments won't be subject to punch or break rounding segments. Checking the
options for punch and break rounding will apply those settings to your created segments.
Warnings
Accruals: These settings allow you to choose one of three accrual warning options for situations where an accrual
balance may go into negative amounts:
n
Do not warn if balance will be negative: This option will not give you any warnings for negative bal
ances.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
31
n
Forecast to current date and warn if balance will be negative:
n
Forecast to date of segment and and warn if balance will be negative
Actual Time: These settings determine what will happen when you edit an existing segment with different hours:
n
Always change time to edited time: With this option selected, edited segments will
always be changed to the edited time, including actual times.
n
Always keep actual times: With this option selected, edited segments will always
keep the actual time in addition to the edited time.
n
Always prompt: With this option selected, you will be prompted for on whether or not
you want to change the actual time.
Colors
The Colors section allows you can change the various highlights for different types of exceptions. For example, if
you wanted segments with breaks to be highlighted in gold instead of red, you would click the color square and
select the new color.
You can also set Row Shading to make the window a little easier to read. Choose your preferred shading color,
then choose one of the three available options:
n
None: This disables row shading.
n
Even row shading: Every other segment will be shaded.
n
Shade alternating date groups in the list: This will shade every other day of segments.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
32
Exception Filter
The Exception Filter allows you to filter segments in Group Hours and other features based on the exceptions
flagged on those shifts. For example, if your organization required you to approve all overtime segments before
closing the week or running payroll, you could filter all the segments worked that week to see just those segments
that are in overtime so you could approve them all at once.
Exception Filter Criteria
Required for Close Week: This option filters to include segments that must be approved to close the week.
Required for Payroll Reports and Exports: This option filters to include segments that must be approved to
run reports or export information.
Employee Approval: This option filters to include segments that require Employee approval.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
33
Manager Approval: This option filters to include segments that require Manager approval.
Other Approval: This option filters to include segments that require Other approval.
Conflicting Shifts: This option filters to include segments where the employee has segments that are conflicting
with one another.
Short/Long Break: These options filter to include segments where the employee has taken a short or long break,
as defined in their Exceptions tab.
Long Shift: This option filters to include segments where the employee has worked a long shift, as defined in
their Exceptions tab.
Long Week: This option filters to include segments where the employee has worked a long week, as defined in
their Exceptions tab.
Missed Punches: This option filters to include segments containing missed punches.
Overtime: This option filters to include segments in which the employee is working in overtime, as determined
by the settings in that employee's Overtime tab.
Absent segment: This option filters to include segments where the employee is flagged as absent.
Tardy 1: This option filters to include segments where the employee is flagged as Tardy 1.
Tardy 2: This option filters to include segments where the employee is flagged as Tardy 2.
Early/Late In/Out: These options filter to include segments in which the employee has exceeded their schedule
variance threshold, as defined in the employee's Exceptions tab.
Creating an Exception Filter
1. In Group Hours, click on the Exception Filter button.
2. Select the exceptions you would like to view. For example, you could select Overtime as well as Required
for Close Week to view all segments in overtime as well as anything else required to close the week.
3. Click Filter to return back to Group Hours with only the segments that meet the selected criteria visible.
4. To remove criteria, reopen the Exception Filter and click on Disable.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
34
Period Reports
The Period Reports feature allows users to create, customize, print, and save reports on employee hours across a
given period. These reports can be customized to show information on selected employees and can be printed as
well as downloaded in HTML, PDF, or OpenXML formats.
When you enter the Period Reports screen, you will see a number of options. You can select the report you'd like
to run from the left. Once you have selected a report, you'll see a number of options on the right. There are also
several options at the top of the screen:
Types of Reports
NOTE: The availability of reports may differ slightly depending on which modules your organization has
purchased.
Payroll Reports
Approaching Overtime Report: This report displays employees that are coming close to or are already in over
time. The length of time until an employee hits overtime can be configured for daily, weekly, bi-weekly, and
quad-weekly overtime as well as differently for salaried individuals in the Settings screen.
Complete Payroll Report: This report displays each shift worked for each employee, including the hours worked
and the total hours worked that day and week. This report is ideal for situations where you need all the information
on a period on hand for an audit or payroll purposes.
Day Breakdown Report: This report provides a breakdown of all job codes worked on a daily basis, giving the
user totals of how many hours were worked in that day.
Estimated Wages Report: This report calculates roughly how much employers can expect to pay in wages over
the reporting period, based on the employee's pay rate, hours worked, and overtime modifiers.
Individual Exception Report: This report details any exceptions that have been reported, and breaks it down
on a per-employee basis.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
35
Individual Job Report: This report compares the total amount of hours an employee worked and the job codes
in which they worked, providing a period total and a break down by job code.
Overtime Report: This report highlights all shifts responsible for creating overtime as well as an overtime total for
each job code and for the pay period.
Payroll Detail Report: This report breaks down individual segments worked by employees, including totals, job
code rates, and break lengths. This report is ideal for situations where you need the most information for a period
available in one place.
Payroll Summary Report: This report simply shows the total regular and overtime hours worked for each
employee. This report is ideal for when the totals for your entire company must be available in one place.
Shift Note Report: This report displays all segments with a note attached as well as the full text of the note.
Supplemental Pay Report: This report provides the difference of the employees' wages and tracked inform
ation versus what is required to meet minimum wage. The employees' rates of pay will need to be less than the
minimum wage set in the report settings; if the rate or average of pay is greater than the minimum wage, then no
data will be reported.
Tracked Information Summary Report: This report displays the cumulative amount of tracked fields per job
code on each employee throughout the reporting period. This report is ideal for receiving quick totals for all
tracked fields your organization uses.
Weekly Punch Report: This report shows the individual punches an employee has made including time in, time
out, and the job code. This report is ideal for situations where you simply want to see when and where your
employees are clocking in and out.
Weekly Schedule Report: This report will show a per-week breakdown of employees' scheduled time.
Weekly Summary: This report displays hours per week (for up to a 6 week period), and separates regular, over
time 1, and overtime 2 hours.
Job Code Reports
Job Code Information Report: This report will display a list of your employees, and will show you which job
codes have been applied to those employees.
Job Code Analysis Detail Report: Selecting this report gives you the option to choose what job codes you
would like a summary of. It will then give you a detailed report on the total hours and estimated wages worked for
each job code broken down by employee as well as totals for each job code and job code group.
Job Code Analysis Summary Report: Selecting this report gives you the option to choose what job codes you
would like a summary of. It will then give you a detailed report on the total hours and estimated wages worked for
each job code as well as totals for each job code group.
Job Code Group Detail: This report will group together hours per each job code, and will total the overall hours,
regular hours, overtime hours, and wages per job code. It also contains punch information, and will group and sub
total information by each sort key. That way, if you sort on Department, then you can subtotal job code information
for that department.
Job Code Group Summary: This report will group together hours per each job code, and will total the overall
hours, regular hours, overtime hours, and wages per job code. It also groups and subtotals information by each sort
key, so if you sort on Department, then you can subtotal job code information for that department.
Job Code Overtime Report: This report displays each segment that created overtime as well as which employ
ees earned overtime in that job code. The report also provides a subtotal of how much overtime was earned by
each job code.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
36
Job Code Split Report: This report breaks down hours into user-defined groups containing the selected job
codes.
Selected Job Code Report: This report provides a detailed breakdown of all hours worked per employee in job
codes selected through the Job Code Filter.
Scheduler Reports
Schedule Variance: This report displays any inconsistencies between employee scheduled segments and the
actual clock operation times for the selected period.
Schedule vs. Actual Breakdown Report: This report provides a breakdown of Scheduled and Actual hours,
including estimated wages, alongside a cumulative amount of the variances, per job code.
Schedule vs. Actual Report: This report provides a breakdown of Scheduled and Actual hours, including estim
ated wages alongside a cumulative amount of the variances per employee throughout the reporting period.
Scheduled Job Code Analysis Detail Report: This report breaks down how many hours were scheduled for
each job code by each employee throughout the reporting period.
Scheduled Job Code Analysis Summary Report: This report summarizes all hours were scheduled in each job
code for each employee throughout the reporting period.
Period Reports
Period Report (Detail): This report displays the cumulative hours an employee worked, sub-totaled by work
week and broken down by regular, overtime 1, and overtime 2 hours.
Period Report (Summary): This report displays the cumulative hours an employee worked, broken down by reg
ular, overtime 1, and overtime 2 hours.
Period Report (Variance): This report displays any variance in the amount of hours an employee worked in that
week compared to a threshold defined in the report Settings. This report is useful for determining if an
employee is eligible for hours-dependent benefits.
Cost Code Reports
Cost Code Budget Report: This report displays the total budget (in dollars and hours) of a cost code, as well as
the segments worked in that cost code. The report also displays any variance in actual hours versus the budget.
Cost Code Summary:This report provides a total amount of regular and overtime hours used in each cost code
throughout the reporting period.
Cost Code Summary by Individual: This report breaks down how many hours were worked in each job code
by each employee throughout the reporting period.
Cost Code Usage Report: This report summarizes all hours worked in each cost code by each employee through
out the reporting period.
Cost Code Punch Detail Report: This report displays which cost codes were used during each clock operation
across the report period.
Individual Cost Code Summary: This report displays a summary of all hours worked in each cost code, broken
down by employee.
Individual Costing Detail: This report includes a breakdown of hours by individual segment, for ease of ref
erencing which cost codes have been used over time.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
37
Period Individual Cost Report (Detail): This report only displays one cost code, and displays each employee
that worked the cost code. It lists regular and overtime hours, and breaks down hours worked by individual weeks.
Period Individual Cost Report (Summary): This report only displays one cost code, showing each employee
that worked the cost code, as well as any regular and overtime hours worked.
Accruals Reports
Accrual Usage Information: This report displays the accrued time, used accrual time, and adjusted totals for the
accrual banks of your employees, and shows when an amount was deducted from an accrual balance.
Future Cost of Accruals Report: This report will provide a cost of an accrual balance based on the amount
remaining, as well as the leave code's base rate.
Period Accrual Information Report: This report displays cumulative amounts or accrued time, used accrual
time, and adjusted totals.
Miscellaneous Reports
Anniversary Report: This report displays all hire date anniversaries that fall within the configured date, as well as
how many years that individual has been employed.
Birthday Report: This report displays all employee birthdays that fall within the configured date. Optionally, the
employee's age can be displayed as well.
Break Totals Report: This report displays all breaks taken as well as the length of breaks and the total amount of
breaks that were paid.
Exception Summary Report: This report will show lists of employees per each type of exception, which is ideal
for identifying issues on a per-exception basis.
Punch Location Report: This report provides a complete list of clock operations throughout the reporting period
as well as where they were made and what method (RDT, WebClock, etc.) was used.
Scheduled Reviews Report: If you schedule occasional performance reviews for your employees, then this
report will display reviews scheduled within a date range, as well as their completion date.
Time Coverage Report: This report breaks down a cumulative amount of hours worked within the selected day,
broken down by hour.
Contract Reports
Contract Details Report: This report provides a list of employees under contract as well as how many days and
hours they've worked in that contract.
Contract Variance Report: This report compares the hours each employee worked versus those that they are
contracted to work, as well as providing a variance in hours and days.
Other Reports
Employee Accrual Bank Report: This report will show you which accrual banks have been assigned to your
employees.
Employee Information Report: This report will provide a list of employees, and can be configured to display
any type of employee personal information that you may need.
Schedule Request Report: This report provides a list of all employee requests during the selected time period,
as well as what leave code the request was made in, and its approval status.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
38
Substitute Report: If you have the Substitute Tracking module enabled, then this report will display a sub
stitute's punch info, and the name of the person that he/she substituted for.
Configuring a Report
1. Select the report you'd like to run from the Period Reports screen.
2. Apply the desired Employee and Job Code Filters by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen.
3. Enter in the date range for the report or select a predefined date range from the dropdown.
4. Click on Settings to change individual facets of the report. These settings are unique to each report, so for
example if you want to remove employee social security numbers from the Period Report (Summary), you
would uncheck "Print social security number at top of page" in the Settings menu.
5. If you would like to change the font, spacing, or page orientation used on the report, click on Page Layout at
the bottom of Settings.
6. Once you have customized the report, click Save to commit these changes and return to the Period Reports
screen.
7. Click on the Download button to change the output the report uses. The types of output TimeClock Plus® pro
duces are:
n
HTML: The output is produced in a .html file that can be opened by a web browser.
n
PDF: The output is produced in a .pdf file that can be opened in Adobe reader or another
program designed to read .pdf files. As the .pdf report is more difficult to edit than the
other formats, many companies use this for producing reports to send out.
n
OpenXML: The report is produced in a .xml file that can be opened in Microsoft Excel or
OpenOffice Calc.
8. Click Preview to see an example report and make sure that it includes all of your criteria.
9. Once you have configured the report, click on your output type (e.g., HTML) to create a downloadable report. If
you wish to print a hard copy, click Print to send the report to a printer.
Saving a Report
Reports can be saved for later use. To save and access reports:
1. Select the report that you would like to save and configure the settings as you normally would.
2. Click on the Save as button.
3. On the Saved Report menu, select a Category you'd like to save this report under. Similar reports can be
grouped in the same category for easy access. Give the report a unique name.
4. If you'd like to allow other users to access this saved report, check Make report visible to all users.
5. To create an employee filter that will consistently be used on the saved report, check Save employee fil
ter and create the filter.
6. To create a unique set of options the report, check Save options and configure the report.
7. Click Save to add the report to Saved Reports.
8. To run this report later, select Saved Reports under the Reports menu.
Automating Reports
When a user is saving a report or editing a report that has already been saved, they can set it up to be sent out
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
39
using Automation Utility. To do so:
1. When adding or editing a saved report, click Add under the Report Automation header.
2. Create a Description for the automated report. This is how it will appear in Automated Tasks.
3. Select the User to run automation. The report will be ran with the permissions of this user.
4. Choose whether or not you want the automation to be Active by toggling that checkbox.
5. Select a Reporting Period. This is the range of dates the report will run for. The different Reporting Peri
ods that can be selected are:
n Fixed Period: The report will always run between the two selected dates
n
Fixed to today: The report will always run from the selected date to the current date at the time of
automation
n
Fixed to yesterday: The report will always run from the selected date to the day before the auto
mation is run.
n
Floating period: The report will run using a defined period from the Period dropdown. This
range can be modified by changing the Period start and stop offset times to go forward or back sev
eral days.
6. Click Next to view the Output Options. Select whether you would like to Generate a single report that
contains all information, or Generate personalized reports for each employee included (each report
will be rendered separately). Additionally, pick at least one type of output from the Output Formats
column.
7. If you would like the report to be sent even when there is no relevant information, check Generate out
put even if there is no data to include. If the report generates exceptions and you would like to view
them, check Include exception log with output.
8. Click Next to access the list of Mailing Recipients. Here you can enter in a list of e-mail addresses you'd
like to have the report sent to. If you are logged in as a non-ADMIN user and would like to receive the
report, check Include the user that runs automation as a recipient.
9. Click Next to edit the body of the e-mail. This is a brief message that will be sent along with the reports. If
left blank, just the reports will be sent.
10. Click Next to schedule when the report is sent. Click on the
icon to set up a Schedule Task Rule. Chose
when you'd like to Execute the rule:
n Once: The report will run and be sent once at the scheduled date and time.
n
Every: The report will run every X minutes, starting from a date and (optionally) ending at a set
date.
n
Daily: The report will run at a set time on each of the selected dates, beginning on the first date
and (optionally) ending at the second date.
n
Monthly: The report will run at a set time on a certain day of the month. Optionally, and end date
can be configured here.
n
Yearly: The report will run on a set time and date each year until the optional end date is reached
n
First: The report will run on the first day of the week in a selected month plus or minus a set
amount of days at the specified time (for example, the First Monday of January plus 7 would run the
report on the second Monday of January).
n
Last: The report will run on the last day of the week in a selected month plus or minus a set amount
of days at the specified time (for example, the Last Friday of January minus 7 would run the report
on the second-to-last Friday of January).
11. Click Save to commit the Scheduled task, and Finish to save the report. The report should now appear in
Manage Automated Tasks.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
40
Report Options
The Options menu of the Payroll Report screen provides users with options to customize the format and con
tent of their Payroll Reports. Please note that these are general options in regards to how the report and employ
ees are formatted and displayed; for control over the information the report displays, click on each individual
report's Settings button.
Click on the to expand a section, or click Expand all or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save the options, or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Formatting Options
Time format: This option determines the way time is displayed on the report. Time can be set to:
n
Company default: The format chosen when setting up the company.
n
Server default: The format chosen by the culture used on the database server.
n
Server default fixed: The format chosen by the culture used on the database server, but always using
two digits for the hour (e.g. 04:15 pm for 4:15 pm).
n
Hour:Minute: 4:15 PM.
n
Hundredths: 4.25 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 1: 1615 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 2: 16:15 for 4:15 PM.
Date format: This option determines how dates are displayed. Dates can be set to display as the company
default, the server default, Month/Day/Year, or Day/Month/Year.
Hour format: This option determines how segment lengths and other lengths of time are displayed on the
report. Hours can be set to display HH:MM (e.g., 4:15 for four hours and fifteen minutes) or HH.HH (e.g., 4.25 for
four hours and fifteen minutes). Please note that there may be rounding errors when using the HH.HH method,
which can be mitigated by extending the amount of decimal places used.
Decimal places: If you are using HH.HH for your report, this is where you determine how many decimal places
the time goes out to before rounding. For example, a segment that is seven hours and nineteen minutes long
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
41
comes out to 7.3167 hours. If the decimal places are set to two, the segment is rounded to 7.32 hours. While this
still converts to 7:19, over time this can lead to employee hours being off by several minutes. Setting the Decimal
places value would record the accurate length of 7.3167 hours.
Name format: This option determines how employee names are displayed. The options are:
n
Full name: John Smith
n
Partial name: J. Smith
n
Last, First: Smith, John
Normalize employee names to same case: Checking this option will show all employees with the same casing.
This is useful if you have imported employee information from multiple sources and some employees are in upper
case.
Normalize job code names to same case: Checking this option will show all job codes with the same casing.
This is useful if you have imported job code information from multiple sources and some job codes are in upper
case.
Miscellaneous
First, Second, and Third sort keys: The sort keys determine the order by which your employees are displayed.
You can use up to three sort keys. The employees will then be sorted by the first key. Once employees are sorted,
the second key runs to determine those employees that have the same criteria for the first key. The types of sort
keys used are:
n
ID Number: The employee's ID number.
n
Last Name: The employee's last name.
n
First Name: The employee's first name.
n
Export Code: The export code assigned to an employee.
n
Social Security: the employee's social security number.
n
Classification: The employee's assigned classification.
n
Department: The employee's assigned department.
n
Manager: The user that the employee is assigned to.
n
Badge Number: The employee's assigned badge number.
Default reporting period: This option selects the time frame reports will default to.
Print Options
Hide overtime 1 column if not present on report: With this option selected, Overtime 1 will not be displayed
on the report if none of your employees went into overtime during that period.
Hide overtime 2 column if not present on report: With this option selected, Overtime 2 will not be displayed
on the report if none of your employees went into Overtime 2 during that period.
Use bold printing to emphasize totals: With this option selected, totals on reports will be bolded for
emphasis.
Report line spacing (0.8-3.0): This option allows you to set how much space appears between lines of a report.
For example, if you wanted the report to be double-spaced (a blank line between every line of data) you would
enter 2.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
42
Shading color for shaded sections on reports: This option allows you to select what color will appear on
shaded sections within the report. Shaded sections can be defined in the Settings for most reports.
Period Export
The Period Export screen allows you to export segments worked to a third party payroll software. The exact
steps to performing a period export will depend on the export module you are using, but the general layout of
the Payroll Export screen remains the same. For more information on how to configure the Period Export screen
for your payroll software, please refer to the module documentation.
At the top of the Period Export screen is an information bar. This allows you to select what software you'd like to
export to and the date range you'd like to export. There are also four buttons for configuring and customizing your
report
Employee Filter: This button brings you to the Employee Filter screen.
Job Code Filter: This button brings you to the Filter Job Code screen.
Save: This button allows you to save an export configuration for later use (see Saving a Template below).
Load: This button allows you to load a saved configuration.
Configuring the Export
1. Select the program you'd like to export to from the dropdown list.
2. Change the basic configuration of the export such as whether or not the hours are split by job code (recom
mended for most exports) and the name of the export file in the Settings section.
3. Assign payroll items and configure options specific to your payroll items in the Configuration section.
4. Determine how the export will be displayed in the Options section.
5. If you'd like to filter the export to only display certain employees or job codes, use the Employee Filter
and Job Code Filter buttons at the top of the screen.
Performing the Export
1. Once the export has been configured, click Generate to begin the export process. If you have not saved
your configuration, you will be asked if you'd like to do so now.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
43
2. If any exceptions occurred during the export process, the Show Exceptions button will become active.
Clicking this button allows you to see the errors and exceptions that occurred while creating the report.
3. To download the export file for your payroll software, click Download.
Saving a Template
1. Once your export has been configured, you can save it as a template in order to easily access it in the
future. To do so, click on the Save button.
2. On the Save Export Screen, enter in a name for the template.
3. Configure the options for the template:
n Default: Enabling this option automatically loads this saved template when you enter the Period
Export screen.
n
Make Public: Enabling this option makes this template available for all other users that have access
to Period Export.
n
Save output file name: Enabling this option saves the file name for the export for future use.
n
Save employee filter: Enabling this option saves the employee filter options you are using (if any)
for future use.
n
Save job code filter: Enabling this option saves the job code filter options you are using (if any) for
future use.
n
Save current options: Enabling this option saves the options configured for the export for future
use.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
44
4. Once you've configured the template, click Save to store the template for future use.
5. If you'd like to delete a previously saved template, click the
icon next to the template name.
Time Sheets
The Time Sheets feature allows users to assign time sheets for up to a week to any number of employees. This fea
ture can be used to quickly add time sheets to multiple employees for events such as vacations or Holidays. In the
example below, we will be assigning a day of vacation to all of our employees for the company's Fourth of July pic
nic.
Creating Time Sheets
1. Select Time Sheets from the Hours menu.
2. Select the employees you would like to create time sheets for from the employee list, or set an Employee
Filter to only include specific employees. Once your employees have been selected, click Next.
3. User the Previous and Next buttons to select the week you'd like to enter in time sheets for. If you'd like
to enter in a time sheet for Saturday or Sunday, click on the Display weekends checkbox.
4. Once you've selected the week you'd like to add hours for, click Add on the day you'd like to create a time
sheet for. By default, the day will populate with an anchor time and length of the time sheet.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
45
5. To edit the details of the time sheet entry, such as the anchor time, hours, job code, cost code, rate, or
notes, click on the Edit button.
6. To add an additional time sheet for the same day, click on the Add button again.
7. If you'd like to copy the time sheet segment to other days of the week, click Copy and select which day(s)
you'd like to create time sheet segments for.
8. To remove a segment, click Clear. Once the time sheets for the week have been created, click Next.
9. On the Summary screen, you will see a brief summary of the time sheet segment(s) you are adding. Click
on Preview to validate the time sheets without actually creating them. If the previewed operation doesn't
have any errors, create the segments by clicking Process.
BEST PRACTICES: Always select Preview before processing an operation that adds segments to mul
tiple employees. Adding a time sheet can't be easily undone, so previewing an operation will help you
pinpoint any errors made and prevent the need to delete successful time sheets and try again.
Employee Menu
The Employee menu is where many users of TimeClock Plus® will be spending the majority of their time. This
menu allows users to:
n
Create Employee Profiles and edit the employees' information, job codes, managers, and exceptions.
n
Create Employee Roles that allow for multiple employees to be assigned the same settings.
n
Modify multiple employees' data all at once via the Global Modification tool.
n
View, edit, and delete Employee Messages that have been sent globally.
Employee Profiles
Employee Profiles is where you will add and edit employee information. It is also where you will assign job
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
46
codes to the employee.
On the left side of the screen, you will see a list where the first 100 employees will appear. Specific employees or
a different range can be set using the Filter button. Employees can also be filtered by typing a name or number
into the Search bar. Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will revert the list to the previous settings.
The list can also be sorted by several methods in ascending or descending order by hovering over the Sort button
and selecting a method.
Once you have an employee selected, their employee information should appear in the header bar. This bar
shows some basic information about the employee, such as their name, ID, Manager, Department, Default Rate,
and Job Code.
Each tab includes multiple sections. Click on the to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to
show or hide each section. When you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go
back to the previous settings.
Adding an Employee
1. Click the Add button in the top right corner of the screen to bring up the Add Employee Wizard.
2. Enter in basic employee information on the General Information screen. The three fields required to add
an employee are First Name, Last Name, and Employee ID, which should automatically fill in with the
first available number. Additional fields may be required, which can be configured in the Manager Tab of
Company Defaults. Once you have entered the required information, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
47
3. Assign a job code to the employee Job Codes screen. To assign a job code to an employee, click Assign.
In the Assign Job Code Items window, you will have the option of clicking one or more job codes and
clicking Assign to assign them to an individual. You can also change the default rate for the selected job
code(s) by clicking on the Rate dropdown below the job code list. Once you have assigned a job code,
you can click Next to go to the final screen, or Finish.
4. If desired, select the job code an employee will default to on the Defaults screen. Setting a job code as
default automatically selects the job code for that employee.
5. Once you are happy with the employee’s settings, click Finish to add the employee to the employee list.
Assigning a role to an Employee
If you have set up roles via Employee > Employee Roles, you can assign the role to the employee on any tab in
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
48
Employee Profiles.
1. To assign a role, click on the gray Select Role button on the right side of the window, and choose a role
from the list.
2. If the role utilizes automatic breaks or recurring schedules (which are both set up on the Hours Tab of the
employee and role profiles), then you can set effective dates for both of those features.
3. Once the desired settings are in place, click Select to save the role to the employee.
Adding a Photograph to an Employee
1. To add a photograph to an employee, click on the Edit Photo link on the left side of the employee's pro
file (next to the employee list). This will open up a Manage Photo window.
2. Choose the Browse button. This will allow you browse and locate a photograph of the employee.
3. Click Update. This will save the photograph to the employee's profile.
4. To delete a photograph, click Edit Photo again, and choose the Delete button in the Manage Photo win
dow. This will clear the photo from the employee's record.
Deleting an Employee
Click the Delete button to bring up the Delete Employee prompt. On this screen you can delete the employee
by clicking the green Ok button.
TIP: It is strongly recommended that you do not delete employees that already have hours logged in
the system. Deleting an employee will also delete ALL of their records. If an employee no longer needs
to be on the list, consider suspending the employee (by checking Suspended in the Information Tab of
Employee Profiles) or entering in a Termination Date.
Information Tab
The Information tab of Employee Profiles is where users will enter in general information about an employee
after the employee been added to the system. The only fields required in the General tab are First and Last
Name. However, it is strongly recommended that you include a Hire Date in order to make sure that some func
tions of the software (accruals and other behind-the-scenes calculations) process properly.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
49
Click on the to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Personal
Employee ID: The employee's numeric employee ID. This is how many individuals will log into WebClock or clock
devices to perform clock operations.
First Name: The employee’s first name.
Last Name: The employee’s last name.
Address: These two fields are for entering in an employee’s address.
City: The city in which the employee resides.
State: The two-letter abbreviation of the employee’s state of residence.
Zip: The employee’s postal code.
Gender: A dropdown menu to select the employee’s gender.
DOB: The employee’s date of birth, written as mm/dd/yyyy (e.g., 1/4/1970 or 10/14/1982).
SSN: An employee’s nine-digit social security number.
E-mail: The employee’s e-mail address.
Cell: The employee’s cell phone number.
Phone: The employee’s phone number.
Company
Classification: This is where you can set a numeric classification of the employee. Classifications are numeric iden
tifiers that you can use to filter employees (e.g., 1 for full-time, 2 for part-time, 3 for variable-hour.)
Department: This field is where you will set the employee’s department, and it accepts both text entry and drop
down selection entry. You can type a new department into the field like you would for any other blank, and when
you save the employee, the department will be available in the dropdown for other employees. Along those same
lines, you can choose a previously entered department from the dropdown if another department is available.
Export Code: This is where you will enter in an employee’s export code. This is the identifier you will use when
exporting data for a payroll software. Please refer to the documentation for your period export module on when
and how to use this field.
Hire Date: This is where you’ll enter in the employee’s hire date. Though not required for employee entry, it is
recommended that a hire date is entered to make sure accrual rules and other behind-the-scenes calculations pro
cess correctly.
Termination: If an employee is no longer with the company, this is where you can enter the employee’s ter
mination date. Entering a date for employee termination will mark an employee as terminated for filtering and
report purposes. The employee will also be unable to log in and perform clock operations.
Suspended: This checkbox indicates whether or not the employee is suspended. When checked, this employee
will count as suspended for filtering and report purposes. The employee will also be unable to log in and perform
clock operations.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
50
Work status: This allows you to designate your employees as Full time, Part time, or neither, for filtering pur
poses.
Other
Network ID: This is the employee’s identifier on your local network.
LDAP User Name: If you have the LDAP authentication module, this will be the employee's LDAP identifier.
PIN: This is where you will enter an employee’s Personal Identification Number (PIN). This can be used when the
employee clocks in and out to provide additional security.
Badge: This is where you will enter in an employee’s badge number. The badge number can be used on a clock
device with badge-reading capabilities to identify the employee.
Jobs Tab
The Jobs tab is where you manage the job codes assigned to the selected employee. From here, you can add,
edit, and delete job codes that the selected employee has access to as well as change employee settings for each
job code.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
51
NOTE: Changes made on the employee job code level will be unique to that employee. For example,
changing an employee's rate in a job code that they are assigned will not change that for any other
employees. To modify existing job codes for several employees, see Employee > Global Modification.
The Jobs tab consists of three sections: Job Code, Default, and Rate Change History. Click on the to expand
out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you have finished making
changes to the tab, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Assigning a Job Code
1. Click Assign to open up the Assign Job Code Items window.
2. At the bottom of the window, select a job code not already assigned to the employee. To filter job codes
by name or ID, type the criteria in the search bar and click Search. Click the X button to clear the search.
3. To change the rate that the employee will earn in that job code, select the appropriate option under Rate.
4. Once you have one or more job codes selected, click Assign to assign those job codes to the employee.
Changing Job Code Settings
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
52
Click on the
icon to access the Configure Job Code window. Note that the modified settings here will only
affect the selected employee. To change the default settings of a job code for all employees, see Job Codes.
Overwrite individual’s default pay rate: This checkbox allows you to enter in a unique rate of pay for this
employee when working in this job code.
Active: Flagging the job code as Active allows the user to clock in and out. If this is not checked, the job code will
still be assigned to the user, but he or she will not be able to clock in or out using it.
Clockable: The clockable checkbox determines whether or not a user can clock in or out. If it is unchecked but the
code is active, the user will not be able to clock in or out in the job code, but their manager could assign a shift.
Unclockable job codes are most often leave codes such as Sick or Vacation.
Allow time sheet entry: Enabling this option will allow the user to enter time sheets for this job code in WebC
lock. This is useful for traveling employees or those that may not have access to the clock normally. Time sheets
must also be enabled in the employee's Manage tab.
Auto transfer hours from schedule during close week: Enabling this option will automatically transfer sched
uled hours in the upcoming week as hours worked in this job code by the employee. If enabled, hours will transfer
as part of the close week process.
Overtime
These settings determine how overtime is calculated within this job. The options selected here will determine
how these hours count toward the settings in the Overtime Tab.
No Overtime: Hours worked in this job do not earn or count towards overtime.
Counts toward overtime: Hours worked in this job do not earn overtime, but will count towards the overtime
threshold if the employee also works in a job code that earns overtime.
Counts toward and earns overtime: Hours worked in this job code count towards and earn overtime.
Force Overtime Settings:These options determine whether or not the job code forces overtime hours. You are
given the following options:
n
Do not force overtime: Hours are calculated normally.
n
Force overtime 1: Hours worked in this job code will automatically be processed as overtime 1.
n
Force overtime 2: Hours worked in this job code will automatically be processed as overtime 2.
Tracked Fields
Tracked fields are numbers that you can require an employee to enter before or after working a segment. Com
mon uses for Tracked fields are miles, tips, calls, parts, and other variables that may change with each shift. Up to
three different tracked fields can be defined within the Company Defaults.
The software can be set to ask employees to enter in any of the tracked fields manually,when they clock in or out,
or both.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
53
Custom: Clicking the Custom button will allow you to access custom fields that have been assigned to the
Employee Job Code feature. For more information, see Custom Fields.
Deleting a Job Code
To delete a job code from the employee, click on the
icon. This will remove the job code from the employee. If
the employee already has hours in this job code, clicking on the
icon will bring up a screen suggesting that the
user to make the job code inactive instead. This is to ensure that you have accurate records for this employee.
Changing Job Code Defaults
The Default section contains several options that determine the employee's default rate, job code, and if the job
costing module is enabled, default cost code and group.
Default pay rate: This is the employee's default hourly rate. Job codes that use the default option will pay this
amount per hour.
Default Job Code: This is the employee's default job code. If you'd like the employee to always clock in using
this job code, check Use default job code when clocking in. (the employee can always change job codes
later).
Default Cost Code: This is the employee's default cost code. If you'd like the employee to always clock in using
this cost code, check Use default cost code when clocking in. (the employee can always change cost codes
later).
Cost Code Group: This is where the user assigns a cost code group to this employee.
Rate Change History
Whenever you alter an employee's default rate, or the rate of one of that employee's job codes, then a record will
be created in the Rate Change History section. These changes can be easily referenced here with the Search
bar, and the list of changes can be downloaded via the Download button.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
54
Overtime Tab
The Overtime tab screen is where you can configure the overtime settings for the selected employee, such as
rate, when overtime takes effect, and the overtime calculation.
Click on the to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save your work, or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Rules
Overtime Type
This is where you will select the type of overtime used by this employee. Each employee can earn overtime based
on the following options in the dropdown list:
n
Weekly Overtime: Overtime is based on X hours in the system week (defined to the right).
n
Daily Overtime: Overtime is based on X hours in the day (defined to the right).
n
Best of Weekly vs. Daily: The system will calculate overtime using both weekly and daily. Overtime will
be based on the higher of the two totals
n
Bi-Weekly Overtime: Overtime is calculated on X hours in a 14 day period, as defined by the bi-weekly
base date during company setup.
n
Best of Bi-Weekly vs. Daily: Overtime will be calculated using both daily and bi-weekly methods
n
Salaried: No overtime will be calculated. However, if selected, an option will become available below to
enter the salaried amount per year. This amount will be used in calculating labor cost.
n
Both Daily and Weekly Overtime: The system will calculate overtime on a daily and weekly basis for
employees. Total overtime will be a sum of daily overtime plus weekly overtime. With this method, daily
overtime is calculated first and then regular hours are calculated to determine weekly overtime.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
55
n
Both Daily and Bi-Weekly Overtime: The system will calculate overtime on a daily and bi-weekly basis
for employees. Total overtime will be a sum of daily overtime plus weekly overtime. With this method,
daily overtime is calculated first and then regular hours are calculated to determine weekly overtime.
n
Both Daily and Weekly Overtime (2): The system will calculate overtime on a daily and weekly basis for
employees. Total overtime will be a sum of daily overtime plus weekly overtime. With this method, daily
overtime is calculated first and then all hours are re-calculated to determine weekly overtime. The weekly
and daily overtimes are merged to obtain the calculations for the period.
n
Both Daily and Bi-Weekly Overtime (2): The system will calculate overtime on a daily and biweekly
basis for employees. Total overtime will be a sum of daily overtime plus weekly overtime. With this
method, daily overtime is calculated first and then all hours are re-calculated to determine weekly over
time. The weekly and daily overtimes are merged to obtain the calculations for the period.
Each of these options (with the exception of Salaried) will give you the following options:
n
Individual also earns a salaried amount X.XX per year: If enabled, you can enter in a salaried amount
this employee receives. This amount will be reflected in labor costing.
n
Ignore regular hours for this individual: With this option enabled, only overtime for this employee
will be reflected in reports and exports.
Overtime Settings
Overtime Settings are where you will configure when an employee goes into overtime. Depending on the over
time type, you will be asked to enter in the amount of hours required to go into Overtime 1 and Overtime 2 per
day and/or week. Since Overtime 2 pays out more than Overtime 1, the time for Overtime 2 must be greater
than Overtime 1.
Multipliers
This is where you will define the rates for Overtime 1 and Overtime 2. By default, Overtime 1 is set to 1.5 (timeand-a-half) and Overtime 2 is set to 2 (double time). However, this amount can be customized to meet the needs
of your company.
Advanced
If your employees receive Overtime 1, Overtime 2, or a special premium on a sixth or seventh consecutive day
worked, or if they receive any of those options on a day marked as a holiday in Company > Holidays, then you can
define those thresholds in the Advanced section.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
56
Hours Tab
The Hours tab of Employee Profiles is where you manage the settings related to clock operations and hours for
an employee, such as clock operation restrictions and shift rounding.
Click on the icon to expand out a section, or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When
you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Rounding
Automatic Rounding: These settings allow you to automatically round shifts to a certain amount of time. This
does not require the use of a schedule, but will automatically take place after round-up time. The first field must
evenly divide into 60 and the second field must be less than the first field. Valid numbers for the first field are 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 30. When using rounding, the actual time will be recorded and viewable as well as the
rounded time.
Example:
Molly's manager wants her shifts to round to 15 minutes when Molly clocks in or out. With the current settings, if
Molly were to clock in at 8:55, it would round to 9:00. If Molly was running late and clocked in at 9:06, it would still
round back to 9:00. However, if she clocked in at 9:08, the clock-in time would round to 9:15. If she were to clock
in at 9:23 it would round 9:30, and so on.
Schedule Rounding: These settings allow the employee’s clock operations to be rounded to their schedule. For
this option to work correctly, a schedule must be set for the employee. When using rounding, the actual time will
be recorded and viewable as well as the rounded time.
Example:
In order to prevent Jeremy from clocking in early or "riding the clock" to get a few extra minutes at the end of his
scheduled shift, the manager has set up Schedule Rounding to round any time clocked 30 minutes before the
shift to record as his scheduled start time. So if Jeremy were to clock in at 8:33 when he is scheduled for 9:00, his
time in would be marked as 9:00. Similarly, to prevent Jeremy from hanging around after he is supposed to go
home, the manager has set him to round at 10 minutes after clocking out. So if Jeremy was supposed to leave at
5:00 but did not clock out until 5:07, the recorded time would read 5:00.
Schedule
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
57
Individual participates in auto copy of schedules during close week: If this option is enabled this
employee’s schedule will copy over from Scheduler into the upcoming week when performing a Close Week
operation.
Assign Schedule: This is where you will assign Recurring Schedules to an employee. For more information, see
Manage Recurring Schedule in TimeClock Scheduler.
Automatic Breaks
The Automatic Break section is where you can assign rules created in Automatic Breaks. These rules are added to
the employee by clicking on Assign. Assigned rules can also be edited to have a start and end date.
Time Zone
The Time Zone section is where you can set an alternate time zone for the employee. This is especially useful if
the employee works in a time zone other than the one set in the Global Tab in Company Defaults.
To enable an alternate time zone for the employee, place a check mark next to Enable time zone, choose the
desired time zone from the dropdown menu, and click Save at the top of Employee Profiles.
Leave Tab
The Leave tab is where you can assign request templates, set request approval levels, and assign accrual banks to
an employee.
Request Templates
Created Manage Request Templates can be added to an employee in this section by clicking on the Assign but
ton. Once assigned, the template can be used by the employee when creating time off requests. Assigned tem
plates can be deleted by clicking on the icon next to its name.
Requests
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
58
The Requests section allows users to determine how many levels of approval are required for a time off request
from the employee. Approving requests in TimeClock Plus® can occur on up to three levels. For example, a
request could require approval from a shift/team supervisor (level 1), department manager (level 2), and an exec
utive or HR representative (level 3).
Accrual Banks
Assigning and Removing Accrual Banks
1. Click on the Assign button.
2. Select the Accrual Bank(s) you'd like to assign.
3. Click on Assign.
4. To delete an assigned Accrual Bank, click on the
icon.
5. Click Save to confirm the changes to the Leave tab.
Modifying Accrual Banks
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
59
1. Click on the
icon next to the Accrual Bank you'd like to edit.
2. Edit the Accrual Rules assigned to this bank. Like job codes, Accrual Banks can be edited on the
employee level.
3. Accrual Banks can be edited similarly to the initial set-up. For more information on editing banks, see
Accruals Overview.
4. Click Save to exit the Configure Accrual Bank screen, and Save to confirm the changes to the Leave tab.
Viewing the Accrual Ledger
1. Select the Accrual Bank you'd like to edit the ledger for.
2. Select the date range you'd like to view a ledger for. A date range can be manually entered, or you can
select a date range from the dropdown menu.
3. To manually add an entry to the accrual ledger, click Add.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
60
4. Select a date and enter in an amount accrued, amount taken, and/or an amount used over the limit. Please
note that the date must be before the actual current date.
5. Enter in a Note for a brief description of the transaction.
6. Click Save to exit the Add screen, and Save to confirm the changes to the Leave tab.
Payroll Tab
The Payroll tab is where you can view cumulative amounts in job codes, and assign shift schedules for shift dif
ferential.
Cumulative
The Cumulative section allows users to view how many hours have been worked in any given job code over a
defined time-span. By default, the employee's hours for the year to date will be visible, but other date ranges can
be defined by entering the desired dates in the date range boxes and clicking Update. Each job code the
employee has worked hours in will be visible as well as the number of regular and overtime hours that employee
has clocked in that job code.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
61
Shift Differential
If you have set up shift schedules in Shift Differential Module, then you can assign the shift schedule in the Shift Dif
ferential section here. Simply choose the desired shift schedule from the Shift schedule dropdown, and click
Save to apply the changes.
Access Tab
The Access tab of Employee Profiles is where you will assign what users have access to this employee, who can
approve employee shifts, and which clock configuration the employee will use in the various time entry locations.
Click on the icon to expand out a section, or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When
you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Access
You can assign a user (an individual's TimeClock Plus® managerial login) access to an employee by clicking the
green Assign button. Doing so will bring up the Assign Users screen. From here, you can select a user and click
Assign to give them to the employee. Once a user has been assigned, you can select the user from the Manager
dropdown to assign that user as the employee’s manager.
To give a user acceptance permission, check that user's Request Notifications checkbox.
Clock Configurations
The Clock Configurations section allows you to select the WebClock, Mobile Clock, and Telephone Clock
configurations this employee uses. You can select an existing configuration (created and managed in Con
figuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configuration) from the dropdown list next to each feature, or click
Create New to create a new configuration.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
62
Exceptions Tab
The Exceptions tab allows you to define what exceptions are tracked by the software, as well as when the soft
ware will count an abnormal clock operation as an exception.
Click on the icon to expand out a section, or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When
you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Approvals
Track employee approval: With this option checked, segments without employee approval will be tracked for
this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own unapproved segments.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, segments must be approved
by the employee before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, segments must be approved by the
employee before hours can be exported.
Track manager approval: With this option checked, segments without manager approval will be tracked for
this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own unapproved segments.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, segments must be approved
by the manager before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, segments must be approved by the
manager before hours can be exported.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
63
Track other approval: With this option checked, segments without other approval will be tracked for this
employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own unapproved segments.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, segments must be approved
by the other supervisor before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, segments must be approved by the
other supervisor before hours can be exported.
Shift Exceptions
Track conflicting shift: With this option checked, segments that share time with another segment (e.g., clocking
in while already clocked in) will be flagged. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own conflicting shift segment
exceptions.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, long shifts must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, long breaks must be approved before
hours can be exported.
Track short break: With this option checked, segments that include or end in a short break (defined in that
break's settings) will be tracked for this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own short break exceptions.
n
Requires approval for clock operation: When this box is checked, an employee returning from a short
break must be approved by a user with access to that employee before the clock operation can be com
pleted.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, short breaks must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, short breaks must be approved before
hours can be exported.
Track long break: With this option checked, segments that include or end in a short break (defined in that
break's settings) will be tracked for this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own long break exceptions.
n
Requires approval for clock operation: When this box is checked, an employee returning from a long
break must be approved by a user with access to that employee before the clock operation can be com
pleted.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, long breaks must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, long breaks must be approved before
hours can be exported.
Track long shift: With this option checked, shifts that are longer than the length of time specified in this field will
be tracked for this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own long shift exceptions.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, long shifts must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, long shifts must be approved before
hours can be exported.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
64
Track long week: With this option checked, shifts within a work week that total to an amount longer than the
length of time specified in the field will be tracked for this employee. This option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view the long week exceptions.
n
Requires approval for clock operation: If this is checked, then an employee with a long week will need
to be approved to clock in by a user who has access to that employee.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, long shifts must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, long weeks must be approved before
hours can be exported.
Track missed in/out punches: When these boxes are checked, segments that contain a missed punch will be
tracked for this employee. These options each include several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own missed punch segments.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, segments containing missed
punches must be approved before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, segments containing missed punches
must be approved before hours can be exported.
Track overtime: With this option checked, segments that put the employee in overtime will be tracked. This
option includes several sub-options:
n
Employee can view: This allows the employee to see their overtime exceptions.
n
Requires approval for clock operation: When checked, the employee will not be allowed to clock in if
they are in overtime, unless approved by a user who has access to that employee.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, segments overtime segments
must be approved before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, segments containing missed punches
must be approved before hours can be exported.
Schedule Exceptions
Track absent segment: With this option checked, absences (clock operations that occur further than the length
of time entered in this field from the scheduled time)will be tracked for this employee. This option includes sev
eral sub-options:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own absences.
Track tardy 1 and 2: With these options checked, clock operations that occur after the length of time specified in
this field from the scheduled clock operation will be tracked for this employee. This option includes several suboptions:
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own tardies.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, long breaks must be approved
before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, long breaks must be approved before
hours can be exported.
Track early/late clock in/out: With these options checked, clock operations that take place outside of the range
(s) entered will be tracked. Each option includes its own sub-options:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
65
n
Employee can view: Check this box to allow the employee to view their own schedule variance.
n
Requires approval for clock operation: If checked, then the employee will be forced to get approval
for their clock operation at the entry location by a user who has access to the employee.
n
Requires approval before closing the week: When this box is checked, schedule variance must be
approved before the week can be closed.
n
Requires approval before exporting: When this box is checked, schedule variance must be approved
before hours can be exported.
Personnel Tab
The Personnel tab of Employee Profiles is where you will manage employee notes, reviews, and messages.
Notes
Notes are brief messages about the employee you would like to keep on their file. To add a new note, click Add.
On the Add Note window, you can enter in a brief (100 character or less) description and a note about the
employee. The buttons below the description allow you to make the text bold, italicized, or underlined, as well as
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
66
change the size. Once written, notes will appear in a table below the Add button listed by description. To view or
edit a note, click on the
icon to the left of the description.
Reviews
The Review section is where you schedule and record reviews with your employees. In order to schedule or add a
review, click Add.
On the Manage Review screen, you can add a date and time for the review by typing it in or selecting it from the
calendar button. You can also click Calculate to calculate a date that is a definable number of days after a defin
able date or after the employee’s hire date anniversary. For example, scheduling 90 days from 5/22/2014 would
set the scheduled review date for Wednesday, 8/20/2014.
Once an employee’s review has been completed, the date can be entered in the Completion date field. Notes
about the review can be placed in the Comments field.
Managing Individual Messages
1. Select the employee you would like to view messages for in Individual Hours.
2. Select the Personnel tab, and open the Messages section.
3. Select the date range you would like to view messages from and click on Refresh.
4. Click on the
icon to edit the message start and stop dates. You can also delete a message by clicking on
the icon, and view if the message has been marked as read or not by looking in the Read column.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
67
Custom Fields Tab
The Custom Fields tab is where custom fields created by either the user or modules will appear. For more inform
ation on creating a custom field, see Company > Custom Fields.
Please note that all custom fields created in the same category will appear in that section. If "Certification," "Date of
Expiration" and "Emergency," were all in the category "Employee Information," all three would appear under the
"Employee Information" section.
Click on the icon to expand out a section, or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When
you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Employee Roles
The Employee Roles feature allows users to create and configure roles. Roles are predefined settings in
Employee Profiles that can be assigned to multiple employees. Roles can be created for different types of
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
68
employees, and information changed in an employee role will automatically be applied to all employees that the
role has been assigned to.
Creating an Employee Role
1. Navigate to the Employee Roles feature in the Employee section, then click on the Add Role button.
2. Enter the ID you would like to use for this rule.
3. Enter the Description you would like to apply to this Role, then click Add to create it.
Editing an Employee Role
1. Select the Employee Role you would like to edit.
2. Select the tabs you would like to edit information for. The information changed here will apply to all
employees with this role, unless the role is overridden on the employee level. The following information
can be set for a role:
General Tab
Here you can change the role Description as well as the Classification and Department of the role.
Jobs Tab
The Job Code tab contains several options for how the role will interact with previously assigned job code items:
n
Assignment clears non-role job code items: Job Code items not assigned to this role will be
removed/deactivated from the employee when this role is assigned
n
Assignment resets role job code items: Job code items will reset back to those on the role when the
role is assigned to the employee.
n
Unassignment clears role job code items: Removing this role from an employee will also remove job
codes added through this role.
Assigning a job code to a role involves the same steps as assigning them to an employee. Job codes can exist
alongside job codes assigned to an employee individually.
Overtime Tab
Overtime Settings and Multipliers can be assigned to the role here.
Hours Tab
Rounding, Clock Configurations, and Automatic Breaks can be assigned to a role here. In addition, three additional
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
69
rules can be checked to change how Automatic Breaks assigned by the role interact with existing breaks:
n
Assignment clears non-role automatic break rules: Automatic break rules not assigned to this role will
be removed/deactivated from the employee when this role is assigned.
n
Assignment resets role automatic break rules: Automatic break rules settings will reset back to those
on the role when the role is assigned to the employee.
n
Unassignment clears role automatic break rules: Removing this role from an employee will also
remove automatic break rules added through this role.
Leave Tab
This tab allows you to assign Request Templates, request approval levels, and Accrual Banks to employees fol
lowing the role.
Payroll Tab
If you need to assign a shift schedule to all employees with this role, you can do so in the Shift Differential section.
Access Tab
Users and Clock Configurations can be assigned here.
Users will be able to access all employees that have been assigned this role. There are also three additional rules
that can be checked to change how users assigned by a role interact with those assigned individually:
n
Assignment clears non-role user access: User access rules not assigned to this role will be unassigned.
n
Assignment resets role user access: Assigned users already assigned to this employee will reset to role
settings when the role is assigned to the employee.
n
Unassignment clears role automatic user access: Removing this role from an employee will also
remove user access added through this role.
Exceptions Tab
Exception tracking and approval settings can be assigned to the role here.
Custom Field Tab
Any custom fields added by a module or for your company can be filled out here.
Assigning an Employee Role
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
70
Once a role has been created and saved, you can assign it to an employee using the following steps:
1. Access Employee Profiles and select the employee you would like to add a role to.
2. Click on the Select Role button.
3. Select the role you would like to assign from the list, and click Submit.
To override sections of the role, browse to the relevant tab and check Override role settings.
Deleting an Employee Role
Employee roles can be deleted. This will also remove the role from any employees that it has been assigned to.
Settings assigned by the role will continue to apply to the employee unless a setting has been checked to prevent
this.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
71
Global Modification
Global Modification is a powerful tool that allows you to change information for multiple employees at the same
time. Global Modification allows you to change most aspects of the Employee Profiles screen for multiple employ
ees at the same time. For example, if you need to assign a job code to multiple individuals at once, then Global
Modification would be the ideal tool to accomplish that.
BEST PRACTICES: Great care must be taken when using this tool, as many changes made through
Global Modification cannot be easily reversed. Therefore, it is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that any
use of Global Modification be preceded by using the Preview button to view the results without writ
ing them to the database.
Using Global Modification
1. Select Global Modification from the Employee menu.
2. Select the Employees radio button and click Next.
3. Select which individuals you would like to modify, by selecting employees from Employee Filter criteria or
selecting them individually from a list. Click Next.
4. Select the Employee setting you would like to modify from the first column.
5. Select the section that contains the option you'd like to modify from the second column.
6. Depending on your previous selections, you may have to select the Operation you'd like to perform in the
third column. Once you have decided on the changes you'd like to make, click on Next.
7. Depending on your selections, you may have to select job codes, accrual banks, or other items from the pro
gram to modify. Select the required items and click on Next. For more information on the choices you can
make here, see the section on that feature.
8. You will be presented with a list of options that you can change within the software. Select the changes
you'd like to make. On several items, you will have a dropdown box that presents three options. Yes and
No will change that option for all selected employees, and No Change will leave that option alone based
on the settings for that particular employee. Once you've made your changes, click on Next.
NOTE: Employees with roles assigned will not have their role settings modified through a global oper
ation unless Override Role was selected.
9. You will be presented with a summary of what will be modified and how many employees will be
affected. Once you have verified the results, click on Process.
TIP: It is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that you click Preview to make sure that the changes made are
the ones you specified; changes made via Global Modification CANNOT be reversed.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
72
Globally Modifying Roles
1. Select Global Modification from the Employee menu.
2. Select Modify Roles and click Next.
3. Select the Employee setting you would like to modify from the first column.
4. Select the section that contains the option you'd like to modify from the second column.
5. Depending on your previous selections, you may have to select the Operation you'd like to perform in the
third column. Once you have decided on the changes you'd like to make, click on Next.
6. Depending on your selections, you may have to select job codes, accrual banks, or other items from the pro
gram to modify. Select the required items and click on Next. For more information on the choices you can
make here, see the section on that feature.
7. You will be presented with a list of options that you can change within the software. Select the changes
you'd like to make. On several items, you will have a dropdown box that presents three options. Yes and
No will change that option for all selected employees, and No Change will leave that option alone based
on the settings for that particular employee. Once you've made your changes, click on Next.
8. You will be presented with a summary of what will be modified and how many employees will be
affected. Once you have verified the results, click on Process.
TIP: It is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that you click Preview to make sure that the changes made are
the ones you specified; changes made via Global Modification CANNOT be reversed.
Employee Messaging
Employee Messaging is a feature that allows users to send out messages to individuals or the entire company.
These messages can serve as reminders, and can be displayed for a set amount of time.
Sending a Company-Wide Bulletin
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
73
1. Click the gray Compose Message button (shaped like an envelope) in the upper right hand corner from
anywhere in Manager.
2. Select Company-wide Bulletin.
3. If you would only like the message to display over a certain time frame, check Message start and/or Mes
sage stop, and select the date and time you would like the message to start and stop displaying.
4. If you would like employees to be able to mark the message as read (preventing it from automatically dis
playing), check Message can be marked as read.
5. Type out your message in the text box and click Send to send the message to all employees this user has
access to.
Sending an Individual Message
1. Click the gray Compose Message button (shaped like an envelope) in the upper right hand corner from
anywhere in Manager.
2. Select Individual Message.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
74
3. If you would only like the message to display over a certain time frame, check Message start and Mes
sage stop and select the date and time you would like the message to start and stop displaying.
4. If you would like employees to be able to mark the message as read (preventing it from automatically dis
playing), check Message can be marked as read.
5. Select the employees you would like to send messages to by clicking on Select recipients. Here you can
select the employees you would like to send a message to by selecting them from a list or creating a filter.
6. Type out your message in the text box and click Send to send the message to the selected recipients.
Managing Company Bulletins
1. Select Employee Messaging from the Employee menu.
2. Enter in a date range you would like to view company bulletins for and click Refresh.
3. You will see a list of all current company bulletins. To edit the start and stop time for a company bulletin,
click on the icon. You can delete a company bulletin by clicking on the icon.
Managing Individual Messages
1. Select the employee you would like to view messages for in Employee Profiles.
2. Select the Personnel Tab, and open the Messages section.
3. Select the date range you would like to view messages from and click on Refresh.
4. Click on the
icon to edit start and stop dates for unread messages. You can also delete a message by
clicking on the icon, and view if the message has been marked as read or not by checking the Read
column.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu allows users to access a variety of tools that are useful for managing employees and data. These
tools include:
n
Import: This is used to import a variety of data into TimeClock Plus®.
n
Export: This allows you to pull any kind of raw data from TimeClock Plus.
n
Employee Status: This allows you to check and see what your employees are up to.
n
Request Manager: Your employees' time off requests are managed here.
n
Unresolved Punches: If you utilize a clock device with fallback mode enabled, then punches done while
offline may show up here.
n
Attendance Monitor: This allows you to keep tabs on your employees scheduled time versus their actual
time.
n
Calculator: This is a simple calculator that can add amounts of time in hours and minutes, and convert
those amounts into hundredths.
n
Hours Audit Log: When edits are made to an employee's time, those edits are catalogued here.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
75
Import
The Import function allows you to import delimited or fixed length files containing employee information into
TimeClock Plus®. This allows you to quickly integrate information from another program into your database, pre
venting the need to double-key employee information or segments.
TIP: If you are creating a new organization, employee information can be quickly imported from else
where by creating a .csv file with the relevant information. Please note that a numerical Employee ID is
required when importing employee information.
Importable Information
n
Employee Information
n
Employee Accruals
n
Employee Job Code Information
n
Employee Punches
n
Employee Rate Changes
n
Job Code List
n
Schedules
n
Employee Segments
Preparing a File for Import
1. If you are importing information from another program, check that program's documentation for exporting
information.
2. If you are entering in the information yourself, create a plain text file.
3. With one line for each piece of information, enter in the relevant field separated by a comma. Once you
have entered in the fields you wish to import, hit enter to create a line break.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
76
4. Repeat this process for each piece of information you'd like to import. Make sure that the information is
presented in the same order on each line.
Importing Information from a Delimited File
1. To import information from a file, choose the file in the Import menu by clicking on the Choose File but
ton.
2. Select the type of data you'd like to import from the drop down menu.
3. Select Delimited ASCII Text. By default the delimiter will be set to comma, but you can also select from
other common delimiters or enter one of your own.
4. If the document has multiple delimiters between fields you wish to import, select Treat consecutive
delimiters as one. If you are importing information where some of the fields might be blank, it is recom
mended you do not use this option.
5. If you wish to skip the first records in the file, select the rows you'd like to leave out in the Records to skip
field.
6. If the first line of the file is a header that identifies each field in the file, check "Use the first line in the
file as the header to automatically map the fields"
7. Once you have configured the import, click Next to map the fields.
8. On the Map data screen, you will see the different fields within the file along with the first imported field.
Next to the field, there is a Mapped as drop down. This is where the fields will be matched in TimeClock
Plus.
9. If the field has characters at the beginning that shouldn't be imported, select the number of characters to
Offset.
10. Once you map the fields you'd like to import, click Next.
11. If the required fields have been mapped, you are taken to the Review screen. If you'd like to save the
mapped fields for future imports, select Save Import Settings.
12. If you are unsure if the import will be successful, click on Validate to test the import. This will run the
import and report any errors.
13. Once you have verified the import, click Import.
Importing Information from a Fixed Length File
1. To import information from a file, choose the file in the Import menu by clicking on the Choose File but
ton.
2. Select the type of data you'd like to import from the drop down menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
77
3. Select Fixed Length ASCII Text.
4. If you wish to skip the first records in the file, select the rows you'd like to leave out in the Records to skip
field.
5. If the first line of the file is a header that identifies each field in the file, check "Use the first line in the
file as the header to automatically map the fields"
6. Once you have configured the import, click Next.
7. On the Mark fixed length fields screen, you will see the first several rows. Click where you would like the
division lines to be. For example, if the first two characters of a line are the employee number, click after
the second character to create that division.
8. Once you have defined the divisions of your import file, click Next.
9. On the Mapped Fields screen, you will see the different fields within the file along with the first imported
field. Next to the field, there is a Mapped as drop down. This is where the fields will be matched in TimeC
lock Plus.
10. If the field has characters at the beginning that shouldn't be imported, select the number of characters to
Offset.
11. Once you map the fields you'd like to import, click Next.
12. If the required fields have been mapped, you are taken to the Review screen. If you'd like to save the
mapped fields for future imports, select Save Import Settings.
13. If you are unsure if the import will be successful, click on Validate to test the import. This will run the
import and report any errors.
14. Once you have verified the import, click Import.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
78
Export
The Export feature allows you to export information (such as employee information or segments worked) for
other software or for simple record keeping. The export is customized and generated as a plain text file with com
mas separating the different fields.
Exporting Information
1. In TimeClock Manager, browse to Tools > Export.
2. Select the type of information you'd like to export from the drop down menu in the upper left corner of
the screen.
3. If you'd like to customize the header of the export click Add Fields under Header. Then click on the
icon to customize the text, or the icon to remove it.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
79
4. To add fields to the body of the export file, select Add Fields under Body.
5. Click on the
icon next to a field to configure it, or the
icon to remove it.
6. If you want to create a blank line between each record, add the New Line field.
7. If you'd like to include a footer, configure it in the same way that you configured the header.
8. Click Save if you'd like to store this configuration for future use and then click Generate to create a copy of
the export.
9. Click Download to save a local copy of the report in the selected format.
Exportable Information
n
Employee Information
n
Employee Accruals
n
Employee Job Code Information
n
Employee Rate Changes
n
Job Code List
n
Schedules
n
Employee Segments
Configuring Export Options
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
80
1. Click on the Options button in the top right corner.
2. Select the format from Fixed, Delimited, or XML.
3. If the Delimited format is active, select the type of delimiter you'd like to use from the drop down. By
default, the export will use a comma delimiter.
4. If the Delimited format is active and you'd like fields to be in quotation marks, check Surround strings in
quotes below the format.
5. Click Save to commit your changes.
Employee Status
The Employee Status features allows users to monitor employees work status in real time. From the Employee
Status screen, you can see which employees are clocked in, what job code they are working in, and how long the
employee has been clocked in. You can also switch job codes for your employees and clock them out.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
81
After entering Employee Status, you will see a list of your first 100 employees. The top bar will show the number
of employees clocked in, clocked out, on break, and on leave. There are also several buttons you can use to filter
and edit the Employee Status information:
Refresh: This button updates the employee information.
Employee Filter: This button allows you to filter your employees. For more information, see Employee Filter.
Job Code Filter: This button filters clocked in employees by their current job code. For more information, see Fil
ter Job Code.
Options: This button allows you to change a number of settings for Employee Status. For more information, see
Employee Status Options.
Print: This button allows you to print the currently selected tab.
Employee Status Tabs
There are also a number of tabs that allow you to view the employee list in different ways:
All: This tab allows the user to view every employee they have access to, their status, and (if clocked in) their job
code, time in, and location.
Clocked In: This tab only shows clocked in employees, as well as the job code that each employee is clocked in
to, the time they clocked in, and the location of the clock operation.
On Break: This tab only shows employees that are currently on break, as well as the job code that employee is
clocked in to, the time they took a break, the duration of the break, and the location of the clock operation.
Not In: The Not In tab only shows employees that are not currently clocked in. Not In also contains a number of
sub-options:
n
Absent: This view displays only employees that have not clocked in at all during their scheduled segment,
which has already passed.
n
Scheduled: This view displays only the employees that are not clocked in and are scheduled to be
clocked in that day.
n
Not Scheduled: This view only displays the employees that are not currently clocked in and are not sched
uled to be clocked in currently.
n
Auto Out Segments: This will show you any employees who have used an Auto Out segment.
n
On Leave: This option will show any employees that are actively using a leave code. It will also show you
any available shift notes for that segment.
Absent: This tab shows you all employees who did not clock in during the day, if they were scheduled to do so.
Last Punch: This tab shows each employee, their status, their last clock in, and their last clock out.
On Leave: This tab displays employees that are currently clocked into a leave code as well as any shift notes about
that segment.
Hours: This tab shows each employee, their hire date, the amount of hours worked today, the amount of hours
worked this week, their employee status, and the last time that employee clocked out.
To sort employees on any tab of the Employee Status list, click on the column header. To manage individual
employees, right click on a name or select Segment.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
82
TIP: Multiple employees can be managed at once in Employee Status. To do so, hold down the Con
trol key and click on the employees you would like to edit, then perform the desired action using Man
age.
Clocking Employees Out from Employee Status
1. Select the employee(s) you wish to clock out from the Employee Status list.
2. Right click on the employee or click on Segment, then select Clock Out.
3. In the Clock Out window, enter the date and time you want the segment to end on, then click on Clock
out.
Changing an Employee Job Code
1. Select the employee(s) you wish to change job codes for from the Employee Status list.
2. Right click on the employee or select Segment, then select Change job code.
3. Enter the date and time at which you want to change the employee's job code, as well as the new job
code, then click on Change.
Creating a Call Note
Call Notes allow you to place a brief note next to an individual's status in Employee Status. This can be used to
show why an employee is not present, or whether or not that employee has been called to pick up a shift. To cre
ate a call note:
1. Select the employee from Employee Status.
2. Click in the Call Note column for that employee.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
83
3. Enter a brief note for the individual, as well as an expiration date and time.
4. Click Save to add the note for this individual. This note will display next to the employee's information until
the expiration time is reached.
Managing an Employee's Hours
1. Click on an employee from the Employee Status list. This should highlight the employee.
2. Right click on the employee and select Individual Hours. This will take you to the Individual Hours win
dow for this employee.
Viewing an Employee's Shift Information
1. Select an employee from the Employee Status list.
2. Right click on the employee and select View Shift Info.
3. On the Shift Information window, you will see all segments that the employee worked today.
Employee Status Options
The Options menu for Employee Status allows you to change how much of the information displays within
Employee Status.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
84
Highlight segments over __ and __ Hours: Enter in two different times for which you'd like to see when shifts
go over. By default, this will highlight shifts at 8 hours and again at 12 hours to provide a quick visual reference for
when an employee has worked a long shift.
Include classification: Checking this option allows you to view the employee's classification on the Employee
Status screen.
Include department: Checking this option allows you to view the employee's department on the Employee
Status screen.
Show actual time for last punch: Checking this option allows you to view the actual time for the last clock oper
ation the employee has performed instead of the rounded time recorded by the system.
Include phone numbers: This option allows you to display employees' phone numbers, which is useful for situ
ations where you may need to contact them.
Double Click Action: Select one of the options as the action you'd like Employee Status to perform when you
double click on an employee in the list.
n
Open Clock Out: Double clicking will open the Clock Out window.
n
Open Change Job Code: Double clicking will open the Change Job Code window.
n
Open shift info: Double clicking will open the employee's shift info.
n
Open Individual Hours: Double clicking will open that employee's Individual Hours window.
Change Highlights: The bottom row of options allows you to change how a shift is highlighted if it meets the lis
ted criteria. You can pick from a number of preselected color options, or select the red X if you do not want shifts
of this type highlighted.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
85
Request Manager
The Request Manager feature allows users to view, add, edit, approve, and deny employee time off requests.
Time off requests can be submitted by the individual, or created by the user in any leave code(s) that the
employee may have access to.
Navigating Request Manager
1. Access Request Manager in the Tools menu.
2. By default, employee requests will be visible in a Calendar view. In order to view employee requests in a
sortable list, select the List tab.
3. On the Calendar tab, the amount of requests seen per day can be selected by changing the value of the
Requests per calendar day field. you can filter requests by employee or leave code by selecting Filter.
The status of a request (approved, denied, or pending) can also be filtered by checking and unchecking
the appropriate options in the information bar and selecting Apply.
4. To have finer control over what request elements are visible, switch to the List view. In addition to the
options available in Calendar view, segments can be organized by entering in a date range and clicking
Refresh. Segments can be grouped by a number of criteria, such as the individual's ID Number or Request
Date by selecting the appropriate sort criteria in the Group by dropdown and clicking on Apply.
Adding a Request
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
86
While employees can create their own request segments with the appropriate clock configuration, users are also
able to create request segments for employees they have access to. To create a request segment:
1. Click on the Add button on the information bar, or select the plus sign in Calendar view on an appropriate
day.
2. Select the employee you would like to create a time off request for from the Employee dropdown.
3. Select the date you would like to create the request for. The date must be within the range defined in the
Client Tab of Company Defaults.
4. Select the Start time, which will be the anchor point for the leave time sheet. Enter in the length of the
leave request in the Hours field. For example, if you wanted to create a leave request from 9:00 AM to
5:00 PM, you would enter a start time of 9:00 AM and a length of 8:00.
5. Select how many days you would like the request to repeat for. By default, the request will only be
entered for the initial date requested. To create identical requests on the subsequent days, select the num
ber from the Days field.
6. Select the Leave Code this employee will use for this time off request. If enabled in Company Defaults,
an unspecified leave code can be selected. Please note that any unspecified leave codes must be
replaced with a valid leave code before the segment can be approved.
7. Enter in a description for this leave request. Depending on the setup in Company Settings, this step may
or may not be optional.
8. Click Save to add this request.
Editing a Request
Users are able to edit the details of pending requests entered by users or individuals. This allows users to change
the date range, leave code, or other aspects of the request before it is approved. To edit a request:
1. Select the request from either Calendar or List view, then select Detail by either right clicking on the seg
ment or selecting it through the Manage dropdown button.
2. On the Employee Request Detail window, you will be able to see information regarding the request as
well as its approval status and description. To change the date, time, or job code, click on the Edit button.
3. If you would like the request to automatically create a time sheet for hours worked, check Automatically
assign hours. If you would like the request to automatically be added to that employee's schedule, check
Automatically schedule. The employees hours and schedule for the time period of the request can be
viewed by clicking on the Individual Hours and Manage Schedule buttons.
4. A note can be entered about the request in the Manager Note section. This allows users to keep track of
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
87
reasons for individual requests.
5. Click Save to commit these changes to the request segment.
Approving and Denying Requests
Once a requested time off segment has been entered, a user with proper permissions can approve or deny the
request. Approving requests in TimeClock Plus® can occur on up to three levels. For example, a request could
require approval from a shift/team supervisor (level 1), department manager (level 2), and an executive or HR rep
resentative (level 3). The approval levels can be configured on a per employee basis in that employee's Hour tab,
while the approval levels a user can provide are configured on that user's Permissions tab. Requests must be
approved by all required levels before they will be flagged as Approved.
Approving or denying a segment also removes the ability to edit that request. If Automatically assign hours
and Automatically schedule are checked, the segment will be created within each respective feature.
To approve a segment, select it from either Calendar or List view. Right click on the segment or select the Man
age dropdown. Select the level of approval you would like to grant. Once all required levels have been approved,
the segment will be marked as Approved.
To deny a segment, select it from either Calendar or List view. Right click on the segment or select the Manage
dropdown. Select Deny from the list to mark the segment as Denied and prevent further editing. Please note that
this will deny the request, regardless of whether or not it is partially approved.
Deleting a Request
Requests can also be deleted if they have been entered in error. Deleting a request will completely remove it
from the system. To delete a request, right click on the segment or select the Manage dropdown. Click on
Delete. On the confirmation screen, click Ok to permanently delete the request.
Other Tools
Unresolved Punches
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
88
If your organization uses clock devices with fallback capabilities or mobile apps that allow for offline punches, the
Unresolved Punches feature allows users to view clock operations performed while offline, edit them as neces
sary, and import them in as hours worked.
TIP: Offline punches that did not create an error will automatically import when the application goes
back online. Unresolved Punches is used to verify clock operations that created one or more errors, to
allow for correction and import as necessary.
Viewing and Importing Unresolved Punches
1. Access Unresolved Punches from the Hours menu.
2. If you would only like to view punches from one application (for example, just unresolved punches from a
clock device), select it from the Application Filter.
3. Enter a Date Range you'd like to see unresolved punches for, or select one from the Date Picker, then
click Update
4. The first 100 unresolved punches for the period will be displayed. Search for specific employees using the
Search bar.
5. You will see a list of employees that performed unresolved clock operations, as well as the Operation in
question, the Time the operation was performed, the Job Code used, the number of Attempts made,
and a brief Error message as to why the punch is unresolved.
6. Click on the
icon to view that employee's Edit Hours window for the time period of that clock oper
ation. If you'd like to see the reasons that each punch remains unresolved, click on the number in the
Attempts column.
7. Check the segments you would like to add to the hours worked for that employee and click on Import.
Alternately, to remove these segments, click on Delete.
Attendance Monitor
The Attendance Monitor is a tool that allows users to view employee attendance. Attendance Monitor can be
configured to display employees that have either clocked in or are scheduled to clock in within a specified date
range.
NOTE: The Attendance Monitor will display employees scheduled to work. Accordingly, using this fea
ture requires your employees to have schedules set up within Scheduler.
Filtering Employee Attendance in Attendance Monitor
1. Select Attendance Monitor from the Hours tab.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
89
2. Choose what information you would like to see from the Attendance Filter dropdown. For example, if
you would like to see what employees should be working today, select Scheduled to be working.
3. If necessary, create an Employee Filter or Job Code Filter to narrow the results to a specific criteria.
4. Select a time range for when you would like to view hours, or select a predefined time range from the
dropdown menu. For example, if you would like to see which employees were supposed to clock since
this morning, you could select "Last four hours" from the dropdown menu to automatically configure that
time range.
5. Click Update to view any employee records that meet your criteria. If you would like to print or save a
report containing these employee records, select the Download button in the top right corner.
Hours Audit Log
The Hours Audit Log allows users to view and search for edits made to employee segments. While many oper
ations performed within TimeClock Plus® will be performed by the employees themselves and will not require
user oversight, the Hours Audit Log provides a permanent record of segments that were added, edited, or
deleted by users, as well as information on where, when, and by whom these changes were made.
Navigating the Hours Audit Log
Group by: This dropdown determines how hours will be sorted within the Hours Audit Log. Sorting can be done
by:
n
Date edited
n
Date worked
n
Department
n
Employee ID
n
Employee name
n
Physical location
n
User
Search on dates edited: Selecting this radio button searches for segments edited within that date range. For
example, if you were to search for segments edited in the month of October 2015, all segments that were edited
during that time frame would appear, regardless of when the segment took place.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
90
Search on segment times: Selecting this radio button searches for segments whose times fall within that date
range. For example, if you were to search for segments in the month of November 2015, all edited segments that
took place during that month that would appear, regardless of when they were edited.
Date Range: The date range boxes allow you to select a date range for the edited hours you would like to see. In
addition, several common date ranges (such as month to date, open weeks, or pay period) can be selected from
the dropdown menu.
Refresh:Once a date range and other criteria have been defined, clicking on the Refresh button allows you to
view relevant segments.
Hours Audit Log Filters
Employee Filter: The Employee Filter allows you to filter employee segments by a number of criteria, such as hire
date, employee number, or length of employment.
Job Code Filter: The Filter Job Code allows you to filter employee segments by the job code(s) the employees
worked in.
Advanced Filter: This filter is comprised of several smaller filters:
n
Edit Filter: Enabled by checking Include changes to segments, the Edit Filter allows you to filter
employee segments by the type of edit (adding, editing, or deleting).
n
Approval Filter: Enabled by checking Include approvals, the Approval Filter allows you to filter
employee segments by exception type, override method, or triggering (type) of operation.
n
Location Filter: Enabled by selecting the Include specific features radio button, the Location Filter
allows you to filter by where the segments were added or edited.
TIP: The Edit and Approval Filters can be fine-tuned by clicking on the various option icons next to
their check boxes.
Performing an Hours Audit
1. At the top of the window, select the date range desired for the hour audit. If necessary, select how seg
ments will be grouped and the criteria for the date range.
2. If desired, filter the audit by selecting the valid filter. Segments can be filtered by employee or job code as
well as type of edit or exception type.
3. Once you've configured your audit, click the gray Update button.
4. A list of all relevant segments will appear below the information bar. Segment groups can be expanded or
collapsed by clicking on the icon next to the group.
5. If the employee you are looking for doesn't appear on this list, type in their name or Employee ID into the
Search bar and click on the magnifying glass icon.
6. Each edited segment has a
icon to the right. Click on this icon to open up the Hours Audit Log His
tory. This window will show the time, location, user, and values for each version of the segment.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
91
7. Each individual edit can be selected from the list on the left of the Hours Audit Log History. Addi
tionally, edits can be browsed by clicking the up and down arrows.
8. Each edit will display the old and new values for each applicable field. If nothing was changed for a field, a
single value will appear across both fields.
Configuration Menu
The Configuration menu is where users can configure organization information, such as job codes, cost codes,
and accruals. Under the Configuration menu, users can:
n
Create and edit Job Codes.
n
Create and edit Cost Codes and assign them to Cost Code Groups.
n
Create and modify Automatic Break Rules.
n
Create Accrual Rules and assign them to Accrual Banks.
n
Create and modify other Users, including editing employee and job code access as well as permissions
and Dashboard Templates.
n
Create Custom Fields.
n
Create and Manage Holidays.
n
Create Clock Configurations for employees and clock devices.
n
Change Organization Settings.
n
Change their own User Options.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
92
Users
User Profiles
The User Profiles feature is where you will add and edit other users, as well as their access and rights. It is also
where you will assign job codes and employees to your users.
Users are defined as any people who have a login account for accessing TimeClock Manager, Scheduler, or Clock
Status, with the express purpose of manipulating and/or viewing data. For this reason, users are typically managers
or supervisors.
On the left side of the screen, you will see a list where the first 100 users will appear. Specific users or a different
range can be set using the Filter button. Users can also be filtered by typing in a name or number into the Search
bar. Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will revert the list to the previous settings.
The list can also be sorted in several ways in ascending or descending order by clicking the Sort button.
Once you have a user selected, their information should appear in the header bar. This bar shows some basic
information about the user, such as their department and employee ID. It also contains the Delete button, which
allows you to delete the selected user. See the Deleting a User section below for more details.
In addition, you can use the Apply Dashboard Template button to give a pre-made dashboard widget con
figuration to the user. To learn how to do this, see Dashboard Templates.
Each tab includes multiple sections. Click on the to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to
show or hide each section. When you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go
back to the previous settings.
Adding a User
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
93
1. Click the blue Add button in the upper right corner.
2. Enter the desired User ID for the new user. This is what the user will use to access TimeClock Manager and
Scheduler.
3. Enter in the user's First and Last Name.
4. If you would like to base this user's rights on that of an existing user, select the donor user in the Template
dropdown.
5. Once you have entered in the basic user information, click Add to enter in the user.
Deleting a User
To delete a user, select the user in the user list, and click Delete. This will bring up a prompt asking if you are sure
you want to delete this user. If you are sure, click Ok to permanently delete the user.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
94
General Tab
The General tab is where you will manage the basic information about the user, such as name, e-mail address,
and network ID.
Click on the to expand out a section or click Expandor Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Personal
ID: The user's login ID. This is what the user will use to log into Manager and other TimeClock Plus® applications.
First Name: The user's first name.
Last Name: The user's last name.
Employee Number: The user's employee number if they are also in the system as an employee in Employee Pro
files. The employee ID number can be typed in, or you can click on the dropdown to select the employee profile
from the list.
Active: This check box determines whether or not the user is active. A user must be active to log into TimeClock
Manager.
Network ID: The user's network ID.
E-mail Address: The user's e-mail address.
Department: This field is where you will set the user’s department, and it accepts both text entry and dropdown
selection entry. You can type a new department into the field like you would for any other blank, and when you
save the user, the department will be available in the dropdown for other users. Along those same lines, you can
choose a previously entered department from the dropdown if another department is available.
Options
Manager and Scheduler start in: These will determine whether a certain utility will automatically open as soon
as the user logs into TimeClock Manager or Scheduler.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
95
Use shared configuration in reports: With this option selected, reports will run with the same settings other
users and the ADMIN user have saved. Otherwise, the report configuration will be unique to the user.
Notify for update: If checked, then the user will be notified when there is a system update available.
Show active items by default: If enabled, the user will not see inactive items unless they filter to include them.
User must change access password after __ days: With this option enabled, the user will periodically be
required to change the password they use to access TimeClock Manager and Scheduler. This feature also allows
you to view how long it has been since the user's last password change.
Employee Access Tab
The Employee Access tab is where you will determine which employees a user has access to. Please note that
this does not determine what the user can do with these employees; to set up those rights, see the article about
the Permissions Tab.
By default, the user will have the User has access to all employees option selected, which will give them
access to every employee in the company. To only give the user access to specific employees, follow the instruc
tions below.
Assigning an Employee Filter to a User
One way to assign employees to a user is to give the employee access to a certain employee filter. For example,
you might assign a certain department to a user, allowing that user to only see employees assigned to that depart
ment. This is especially useful if an employee switches departments, as the user's access will automatically update
itself once the change occurs.
To assign a filter:
1. Click on User has access to employees in the following filter.
2. This will provide you with a dropdown where you can choose which employee filter you would like to give
the user access to.
3. If you do not have a filter set up yet, or if you would like to set up a new filter, click on the Create New but
ton. This will allow you to name a new filter, and set it like you would for a standard Employee Filter.
4. If you need to edit an existing filter, you can do so by selecting the filter and clicking the Edit button.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
96
Assigning Specific Employees to a User
1. Click on User has access to only specific employees. You will see the employee list and Assign button
below become active.
2. Click on Assign to view the Assign Employee window.
3. On the Assign Employee window, click on an employee to add them to the list of employees that the
user has access to. You can sort the employees according to the different columns by clicking on the
column head. If you are searching for a specific employee, type the appropriate name or ID into the
Search box to filter the list. Once you have one or more employees selected, click Select to add them to
the employee list.
4. You will now see a list of employees this user has access to beneath the Assign button. To remove an
employee from the list, click on the icon in the left-most column of the employee list.
5. Once you have selected the employees for this user, click Save to confirm the changes, or click Cancel to
revert the changes.
6. To display suspended or terminated employees within the list, check Show suspended/terminated.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
97
Job Code Access Tab
The Job Code Access tab is where you will determine which job codes a user has access to. Please note that this
does not determine what the user can do with these job codes; to set up those rights, see the article on the Per
missions tab.
By default, the user will have the User can manipulate hours for all job codes option selected, which will give
them access to every job code in the company. To only give the user access to specific job codes, follow the
instructions below.
Assigning Specific Job Codes to a User
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
98
1. Click on User can manipulate hours for only specific job codes. You will see the Job Code List and
Assign buttons below become active.
2. Click on Assign to view the Job Code Access window.
3. On the Job Code Access window, click on a job code to add it to the list of job codes that the user has
access to. You can sort the job codes according to the different columns by clicking on the column head. If
you are searching for a specific job code, type the appropriate description or ID into the Search box to fil
ter the list. Once you have one or more job codes selected, click Select to add them to the job code list.
4. You will now see a list of job codes this user has access to beneath the Assign button. To remove a job
code from the list, click on the icon in the left-most column of the list.
5. Once you have the appropriate job codes selected for this user, click Save to confirm the changes, or click
Cancel to revert the changes.
6. To hide inactive job codes from the list, check Active only.
Permissions Tab
The Permissions tab allows you to change what features the user can access within TimeClock Plus®. Most
aspects of each feature can be edited, allowing granular control of what each user can do within the software.
Editing a User's Permissions
1. After selecting a user from the list, select Apply specific permissions to user.
2. Permissions appear in a tree view below. If the box next to a permission or permission set is blank, that user
does not have access to it. If the box contains a checkmark in a white background, that user has full access
to that feature, as well as any sub-features. If the box contains a check mark on a gray background, the user
has access to some of the sub-features. For example, if you wanted to remove the rights to delete hours
from a user, Hours and Manager will show partial access.
3. Click the plus sign next to a feature to view its sub-features. For example, expanding out Manager will dis
play the different menus within manager. Expanding out a menu will display the features contained within
that menu. Expanding out a feature will allow you to change individual rights within that feature, such as
being able to renumber employees.
4. In addition to access rights to various features, System Wide rights can be set. When checked, these rights
allow the user to view and edit sensitive information, provided they have access to that feature.
5. Once a user's permissions have been set, click Save. When the user logs in, they will only have access to the
selected features.
NOTE: Users can only assign permissions they themselves have access to.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
99
Passwords Tab
The Passwords tab is where you can change the passwords that a supervisor uses to log into TimeClock Man
ager and Scheduler, override WebClock restrictions, and authorize restricted actions on a remote data clock
device.
System Access
The System Access password is what the user will need to log into TimeClock Manager and TimeClock Sched
uler. It is recommended that this password be unique for each user.
To change this password, type in the new password in both New Password and Re-Enter New Password and
click Update.
WebClock Override
The WebClock Override password is what the user will need to override restrictions on WebClock. The user will
also require override permissions.
To change this password, type in the new password in both New Password and Re-Enter New Password and
click Update.
Clock Override
The Clock Override password is what the user will need to override restrictions on a clock device. The user will
also require override permissions. This password must be numeric unless the clock device has a badge reader, in
which case the password should be what the override badge reads.
To change this password, type in the new password in both New Password and Re-Enter New Password and
click Update.
Clock Edit Hours
The Clock Edit Hours password is what the user will need to edit hours on a clock device. The user will also
require permissions to edit hours.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
100
To change this password, type in the new password in both New Password and Re-Enter New Password and
click Update.
User Roles
The User Roles feature allows for users to create sets of user permissions to assign to other users of TimeClock
Plus®. This is useful if multiple users' settings need to be updated at once.
Creating a User Role
1. Select User Roles from the Users menu in the Configuration section of TimeClock Plus.
2. Click on the Add button.
3. Enter a brief Description for the new User Role. If you'd like to base this role on an existing role, select that
role from the Copy settings from dropdown.
4. Select what permissions this role will have.
NOTE: Users can only assign permissions they themselves have access to.
5. Once the user role has been configured, click Save.
Assigning a User Role to a User
1. Select User Profiles from the Configuration section of TimeClock Plus.
2. Select the user you'd like to apply a role to, and click on their Permissions tab.
3. Select Assign user to role and choose the role you'd like this user to have from the dropdown.
4. Once the role has been added, click Save to commit the changes. The next time the user logs in, they will
have the access rights assigned by that role.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
101
Job Codes
The Job Codes feature allows users to add, edit, and delete Job Codes.
On the left side of the screen, you will see a list where the first 100 job codes will appear. Specific employees or a
different range can be set using the Filter button. Job codes can also be filtered by typing in a name or number
into the Search bar. Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will revert the list to show every code.
The list can also be sorted by Job Code ID or Description in ascending or descending order by clicking the Sort
button.
Once you have a job code selected, their employee information should appear in the header bar. Hovering your
mouse over the job name will provide basic information, such as the Job Code ID, Rate, and Group it belongs to.
Adding a Job Code
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
102
1. Click on the Add button in the top right of the Job Codes screen.
2. Enter in an unused number in the New Number field to act as the new job code's ID.
3. Enter the name of the job code in the Description field.
4. If you want to base the new job code settings on an existing job code, select it in the Template drop
down.
5. Once you have entered information for the new job code, click Add to add the job code to the list.
Deleting a Job Code
To delete a job code, click on the Delete icon. You will then be asked if you want to delete the job code. If so,
click Ok to remove the job code from your database.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
103
NOTE: Deletion will only work with job codes that do not have any segments assigned to them.
If one or more employees have hours in the job code, you will instead be asked if you would like to
deactivate the job code on the master level and/or employee level. Disabling the job code on the mas
ter level will prevent all employees from clocking into the job code. Disabling it on the employee level
will only disable it for the employees that currently have it active.
General tab
The General tab is where you will enter job code information such as the description and default rates.
Click on the to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Information
Number: This is the job code's identifying number. Numbering allows you to order your codes however you wish.
Description: The name of the job code.
Group: The group name for sorting purposes.
Active: Checking the Active option means the job code is currently in use and employees can clock in under it if
assigned. Please note that marking a job code inactive here will deactivate it for every employee it is
assigned to. To make a job code inactive for just one employee, deactivate it in their Job Code Tab.
Leave Code: Checking this option will mark the job code as a Leave Code. Leave Codes are often used for hol
iday, paid time off, bereavement, or vacation, and will display differently in some reports and export modules.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
104
Defaults
Default Pay Rate:The default rate of pay for this job code. This is used if you need to keep track of estimated
wages on a per-job basis.
Clockable: Checking this option determines whether or not an employee is able to clock in and out of this job
code. If unchecked, a manager can still assign that job code to a segment or the employee can enter in a time
sheet if enabled. Many times, Leave Codes are not Clockable to prevent employees from clocking in to them.
Allow Time Sheet Entry: If this option is enabled as well as Allow employee to manually enter time or
amount based time sheets from client applications in the Management tab of Employee Profiles, the
employee will be able to enter in time sheets for this job code.
Auto transfer hours from schedule during close week: If this option is enabled, all hours scheduled for
employees who worked in this job code will transfer from Scheduler when you close the week.
Do not pay: This option will deactivate all overtime and rate calculations for the job code. This is useful if you are
creating an unpaid leave code.
Overtime:
Earns Overtime Settings: These options determine whether or not the job code counts towards overtime. Each
job code must have one of the listed options.
n
No overtime: Hours worked in this job code do not count towards or earn overtime.
n
Counts Overtime: Hours worked in this job code do not earn overtime, but will count towards overtime if
the employee has worked forty or more hours in job codes that earn overtime.
n
Earns Overtime: Hours in this job code will count toward and earn overtime.
Force Overtime: These options determine if the job code automatically pays out overtime. If the job pays out nor
mally, select Do not force overtime. If any time in the job code is paid overtime, select Force Overtime 1 or
Force Overtime 2 to pay out at the employee's respective overtime rate.
Tracked Fields
Tracked fields are numbers that you can require an employee to enter before or after working a segment. Com
mon uses for tracked fields are miles, tips, calls, parts, and other variables that may change with each shift. Up to
three different tracked fields can be defined within Company> Company Defaults, at the top of the Global
Tab.
The software can be set to ask employees to enter in any of the tracked fields when they clock in, out, or both. It is
also possible to make a tracked field a user-only entry.
Breaks Tab
The Breaks tab in Job Code allows users to configure break settings within each job code, for each active break.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
105
Breaks can be configured to be paid or unpaid, and break minimums and rounding rules can be created on a per
employee basis.
NOTE: Breaks are enabled in Company > Company Defaults on the Global Tab.
Paid Break Settings
Break is paid: This option must be checked in order for employees to be paid for breaks within this job code.
Up to __ minutes are paid if the break does not exceed __ minutes: This option allows you to determine
how long a break can be while still being eligible for pay, and how much of that break will count as paid. For
example, if up to 15 minutes are paid if the break does not exceed 30 minutes is entered, an employee will be
paid for up to 15 minutes of a break as long as they clock back in before a half hour has passed.
Configuring Break Minimums and Rounding
Override Company Settings: This option must be checked in order to configure the rest of the options. Check
ing this will override company break settings as long as an employee takes a break while clocked into this job
code.
A long break is considered: This option allows you to enter in the length of time an employee will have to be
on break to have it be considered a long break.
A short break is considered: This option allows you to enter in a length of time for which an employee will be
considered to have taken a short break if they clock in under it.
Round breaks to nearest __ minutes: This option rounds the break to the nearest amount of minutes entered.
For example, if you have entered nearest 15 minutes and don't use any of the options below, a break of 17
minutes will be rounded to 15, and a break of 24 minutes will be rounded to 30.
If you want the break to round up at a certain amount of time, check Round first X minutes up at Y minutes,
and enter in the amount of time you would like it to round. For example, if you set round first 15 minutes up at 8,
any time spent on break between 8 and 15 minutes would round to 15 minutes.
If you want additional rounding segments to round at a different time, check Round other X minutes up at Y
minutes. For example, if you wanted additional 15 minute segments to round up at 10 minutes, any time on
break between 8 and 15 minutes would round to 15, then any time between 16 and 24 minutes would round to
15, and 25-30 minutes would round to 30.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
106
Custom Fields Tab
The Custom Fields tab is where custom fields created by either the user or modules will appear. For more
information on creating a custom field, see Company > Custom Fields.
Please note that all custom fields created in the same category will appear in that section. If "Requires Cer
tification?" and "Shift Supervisor Required?" were all in the category "Safety Procedure," both would appear under
the "Safety Procedure" section.
Cost Codes
Cost Code Simple Select
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
107
The Cost Code Simple Select screen is where you can create and edit cost codes.
To select a cost code, you can search for it using the search bar on the left hand side, or select it from the drop
down menu for each level. The cost code's settings and information can be managed on its General Tab and its
Custom Fields Tab.
Creating a Cost Code
1. Click Add.
2. Enter in the first level of the cost code. For example, this could be "North Location."
3. Enter in a second level for the cost code. In the example above, this might be "Commission #9."
4. Continue to add the other levels of cost codes as needed.
5. Click Save to save the cost code.
TIP: Cost codes can be as simple as one level, or as complex as all five. Only the first level is required; all
others are optional.
Manage Cost Code Branch
The Manage Branch feature allows users to copy, delete, and toggle activation for whole branches of cost codes.
This allows you to copy sub-branches from one level to another. This is useful for creating a new level one cost
code that might share levels two and three with an existing cost code.
Copying a Branch
1. Select Copy Branch in the Manage Branch menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
108
2. Select the branch you would like to copy. Selecting a branch will copy all of the sub-branches to the des
tination. For example, selecting a level one cost code will copy all level two and three cost codes beneath
it. Check Display active cost code items only to only view active cost codes.
3. Select the destination for the copied branches. For example, if you wanted to copy levels 2 and 3 from one
job code to levels 4 and 5 of another branch, you would select the level 1 cost code in Copy From and the
level 3 cost code you'd like to copy to in Copy To.
4. Check Copy custom fields if you would copy custom fields to the new branch.
5. Click Preview to view the results of the copy operation. Once you have verified the results, begin the copy
operation by selecting Finish.
Deleting a Branch
1. Select Delete Branch in the Manage Branch menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
109
1. Select the branch you would like to delete. Selecting a branch will delete all of the sub-branches. For
example, selecting a level one cost code will delete all level two and three cost codes beneath it. Check
Display active cost code items only to only view active cost codes.
2. If you would like to deactivate cost codes in which employees have already worked, check Deactivate
instead of deleting cost codes with hours.
TIP: Since deleting a cost code will also delete all records of hours worked within that cost code, it is
STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that this option be checked.
3. Click Preview to view the results of the delete operation. Once you have verified the results, begin the
delete operation by selecting Finish.
Activating a Branch
1. Select Activate Branch in the Manage Branch menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
110
2. Select the branch you would like to activate. Selecting a branch will activate all of the sub-branches. For
example, selecting a level one cost code will activate all level two and three cost codes beneath it. Check
Display active cost code items only to only view active cost codes.
3. Click Preview to view the results of the activation operation. Once you have verified the results, begin the
activation operation by selecting Finish.
Deactivating a Branch
1. Select Deactivate Branch in the Manage Branch menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
111
2. Select the branch you would like to deactivate. Selecting a branch will deactivate all of the sub-branches.
For example, selecting a level one cost code will deactivate all level two and three cost codes beneath it.
Check Display active cost code items only to only view active cost codes.
3. Click Preview to view the results of the deactivation operation. Once you have verified the results, begin
the deactivation operation by selecting Finish.
Cost Code Groups
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
112
The Cost Code Groups feature allows users to create groups that contain multiple cost codes that can then be
assigned to specific jobs and individuals. This can be used in situations where an organization may have hundreds
or thousands of cost codes, but employees only need access to a select few.
Creating and Adding Rules to a Cost Code Group
1. Select Cost Code Groups from the Cost Codes section in the Configuration menu of TimeClock Man
ager.
2. Click on the Add button.
3. Enter a Description of 40 characters for the cost code group and click Add.
4. The cost code group will appear on the list of available groups on the left side of the screen. Click on Add
Rule to create the first rule for the group.
5. Select whether or not the rule will include or exclude the selected cost codes by using the Inclusion drop
down.
6. Select a level of job code you would like to include. For example, selecting a level 1 cost code will select all
level 2 and below cost codes. Selecting a level 1 cost code and a level 3 cost code will include any com
bination of cost codes that use those two levels. Once you have selected the levels you would like to
include or exclude, click Save.
7. To fine-tune the rule by adding or removing additional cost code, click on Add Rule to create additional
rules.
8. Once you are finished creating rules, the total amount of cost codes that are included in the cost code
group will appear on the information bar. If you would like to see a list of the specific cost codes included
in this group, click on Preview.
9. Once you are satisfied with the cost code group, click on Save to commit the changes made to the data
base.
Editing Cost Code Rules
1. Select Cost Code Groups from the Cost Codes section of the Configuration menu in TimeClock Man
ager.
2. Select the cost code group you'd like to edit from the list on the left.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
113
3. Select the rule you would like to edit and select the
tion.
icon. Rules can be filtered by using the Search func
4. Edit the rule to include and exclude your desired job codes.
5. If you'd like to delete a rule, click on the delete icon. This will permanently delete this rule.
Testing Cost Code Groups
1. Select Cost Code Groups from the Cost Codes section of the Configuration menu in TimeClock Man
ager.
2. Click on the Test button.
3. Select the two groups you would like to test from the group dropdowns. Select the method of the test
you'd like to use. Intersection will include cost codes that apply to both groups, and Union will include
cost codes that are in either group.
4. Click on the Update button to view the test settings. The cost codes that meet your selected method will
appear in a list below. This list can be searched by typing in a cost code ID or description in the search bar.
Assigning Cost Code Groups to Employees
1. Browse to Employee > Employee Profiles.
2. Select the employee you would like to assign a cost code group to, and navigate to their Jobs tab.
3. Under the Defaults section, select the cost code group you'd like to assign to this employee from the drop
down menu.
4. Click on the Save button to save this employee's cost code settings.
Assigning Cost Code Groups to Job Codes
Please note that assigning a cost code group to a job code in Job Codes will NOT change the cost code group
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
114
settings for employee's that already have that job code assigned.
To assign a cost code group to a job code:
1. Browse to Configuration > Job Codes.
2. Select the job code you would like to assign a cost code group to from the list on the left.
3. Under the Defaults section, select the cost code group you'd like to assign to this job code from the drop
down menu.
4. Click on the Save button to save this employee's cost code settings.
Cost Codes List
The Cost Codes List feature allows you to see all cost codes created for your organization. From here, cost codes
can be added, edited, or deleted as required. If your organization uses several cost codes, they will be broken up
by pages. Other pages can be viewed by clicking the Next (>)or Previous (<) buttons, or selecting the desired
page number from the dropdown. Cost codes can also be copied, deleted, activated, or deactivated through the
Manage Cost Code Branch button.
Creating a Cost Code
1. Click Add. If a job code is selected, you will be asked if you would like to base the new cost code on the
selected code. Click Yes to create a new level based on the cost code or a cost code for that branch.
2. Enter in the first level of the job code.
3. If required, enter a second level for the cost code.
4. Continue to add the other levels of cost codes as needed.
5. Click Save to save the cost code.
Editing a Cost Code
1. Select the cost code you'd like to edit from the list, and click on the Edit button.
2. In the Edit Cost Code window, change any information you need to on the cost code (such as stage,
description, budget, or note) and click Save.
NOTE: Changing the description for any of the levels may move that cost code elsewhere, depending
on if any of the parent levels were changed.
Deleting a Cost Code
1. Select the cost code you would like to delete from the list. To select multiple cost codes, use the check
boxes on the left side of the grid.
2. Click on the Delete button. You will be asked if you are sure you want to permanently delete this cost
code. If so, click Ok.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
115
Cost Code Tree
The Cost Code Tree feature allows you to see all cost codes created for your organization, organized by level.
From here, cost codes can be added, edited, or deleted as required.
If your organization uses several cost codes, they will be broken up by pages. Other pages can be viewed by click
ing the Next (>)or Previous (<) buttons, or selecting the desired page number from the dropdown.
Hovering your cursor over a cost code will present you with a Manage Cost Code Branch button or Edit button,
depending on if the selected item is a branch or an actual cost code. If it is both, both items will appear. If expand
ing out a cost code would push some of the levels beneath it into another page, you will see some reminder text
of how many additional cost codes of that level exist on the next page. When viewing the next page, all parent
levels of the currently selected cost code will be visible.
Cost codes can be copied, deleted, activated, or deactivated through the Manage Branch button.
Creating a Cost Code
1. Click Add. If a cost code is selected, you will be asked if you would like to base the new cost code of selec
ted code. Click Yes to create a new level based on the cost code or a cost code for that branch.
2. Enter in the first level of the job code.
3. If required, enter a second level for the cost code.
4. Continue to add the other levels of cost codes as needed.
5. Click Save to save the cost code.
Editing a Cost Code
1. Select the cost code you'd like to edit from the list, and click on the Edit button.
2. In the Edit Cost Code window, change any information you need to on the cost code (such as stage,
description, budget, or note) and click Save.
NOTE: Changing the label for any of the levels may move that cost code elsewhere, depending on if any
of the parent levels were changed.
Deleting a Cost Code
1. Select the cost code you would like to delete from the list. To select multiple cost codes, use the check
boxes on the left side of the grid.
2. Click on the Delete button. You will be asked if you are sure you want to permanently delete this cost
code. If so, click Ok.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
116
Accruals Overview
Accruals are how the software keeps track of hours earned. Accruals are commonly used to track sick time, vaca
tion time, paid time off, and other forms of paid leave. The accrual process in TimeClock Plus® consists of two
major parts:
n
Accrual Rules determine how many accrual hours are earned by the employee. These can be set to be
earned based on hours worked, or a static amount can be assigned to the employee on designated dates.
n
Accrual Banks determine how many hours accumulate in accrual banks. These hours can then be used in
the job codes designated in the bank.
Accrual Rules and Accrual Banks are kept in separate features. Both can be accessed under the Configuration
menu.
Example
Rob's employees receive two weeks of vacation and personal time on their hire date. In addition, for every hour
worked over 40 in the week earns the employee another tenth of an hour (six minutes) of time towards vacation or
personal time. To accurately reflect this, Rob will create two accrual rules. One will not be based on hours worked
and will post on the employee's hire date anniversary. The other will be based on hours worked and will only
reflect time worked over 40 for the week. The examples throughout the accrual section will explain in greater
detail how Rob will set up this accrual system.
Creating an Accrual Rule Not Based on Hours Worked
1. Select Accrual Rules in the Configuration section.
2. Click on Add.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
117
3. Enter in a Rule ID and Description.
4. Select the radio button: Rule is NOT based on hours worked during a period.
5. Select the amount the accrual rule will post in the Hours to accrue on post date field.
6. Click Next.
7. Select when you would like the accrual rule to post. Accruals can be posted at certain intervals (such as
weekly bi-weekly) as well as monthly or yearly on specific dates.
8. If necessary, place a check mark next to Accruals begin posting, and specify a span and unit of time
based on the hire date. If left unchecked, then accruals will begin posting immediately.
9. If necessary, place a check mark next to Accruals stop posting, and specify a span and unit of time based
on the hire date. If left unchecked, then accruals will post indefinitely.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
118
10. Click on Next to view a rule summary. If the information looks correct, select Finish.
Example:
All of Rob's employees receive two weeks of vacation or personal time starting one year after they begin working
at his organization. Rob's organization defines a work week as 40 hours. When creating this rule, Rob will select the
Rule that is NOT based on hours worked during a period and set the hours to accrue as 80 (two 40 hour
weeks).
After clicking Next, Rob will select Yearly on hire date plus 0 days. With this option selected, every time an
employee with this rule assigned has an anniversary, they will receive 80 hours of time. He will then check Accru
als begin posting and set the time to 1 year. This ensures that employees will not receive the accrual hours until
they have worked there at least one year. Since this will continue indefinitely, Rob will leave Accruals stop post
ing unchecked and click Finish to add the rule.
Creating an Accrual Based on Hours Worked
1. Click on Add.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
119
2. Enter in a rule ID and description.
3. Select the radio button: Rule is based on hours worked during a period.
4. Enter in the amount of hours that will have to be worked before the employee begins accruing hours in the
Process accrual only if counted hours are above field.
5. Enter in the amount of Hours to accrue for each counted hour in decimal format.
6. If the accrual also posts a flat number of hours on the post date, enter that amount in Hours to accrue on
post date.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the job codes that will count towards this accrual. By default, All job code items is selected, but
you also have the option to only use clockable job codes, or select from a list. Once you've configured the
job codes, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
120
9. Select whether Regular, Overtime 1, or Overtime 2 count towards accruing hours. In addition, if you would
like to limit the hours counted to a certain range, enter those hours in the Of the hours counted field.
Once you've configured the hours that count, click Next.
10. Select when you would like the accrual rule to post. Accruals can posted at certain intervals (such as weekly
or bi-weekly) as well as monthly or yearly on specific dates.
11. If necessary, place a check mark next to Accruals begin posting, and specify a span and unit of time
based on the hire date. If left unchecked, then accruals will begin posting immediately.
12. If necessary, place a check mark next to Accruals stop posting, and specify a span and unit of time based
on the hire date. If left unchecked, then accruals will post indefinitely.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
121
13. Click on Next to view a rule summary. If the information looks correct, select Finish.
Example:
In addition to the flat amount of personal time Rob's employees receive, they are also eligible for additional per
sonal time for every hour worked over 40 in the week. To reflect this, Rob will create a Rule based on hours
worked. This rule will provide 6 minutes of personal time per hour over 40, so Rob will use the following settings:
n
Process accrual only if counted hours are above: 40
n
Hours to accrue for each counted hour: 0.1
n
Hours to accrue on post date: 0
After clicking Next, Rob will choose what job codes will count towards earning hours. Rob only wants clockable
hours to count (so taking extra vacation time doesn't earn more time off), so he will select All clockable job code
items. If Rob wanted to only include certain job codes, he could also select them by selecting Only selected job
code items and pick the specific job codes.
After clicking Next, Rob can select what kind of hours will count. To make sure only overtime counts, he will
uncheck Regular hours. He wants all hours over 40 counted, so he will set Of the hours counted, use only
the hours between 40 and 200 (200 being more hours than there are in a week).
After clicking Next, Rob will select the period for this rule. Since he wants these to be posted per week, he will
select Weekly. Since this will only apply to employees that have worked at his organization for over a year, Rob
will enter Accruals begin posting 1 year after hire date. Once the rule is configured according to company
policy, Rob will click Finish to create it.
Creating an Accrual Bank
Once you have created Accrual Rules, you must assign them to one or more Accrual Banks. Accrual Banks are
where the hours earned from Accrual Rules are stored and determine how they can be used. To create an
Accrual Bank:
1. Click Add on the Accrual Bank screen.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
122
2. Enter in a Bank ID and Description of the bank.
3. Click Next.
4. Assign one or more Accrual Rules this bank will use by clicking Assign and selecting them from the list,
then click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
123
5. Assign the job codes that will use hours from this accrual bank. Any time this employee enters in a seg
ment in one of the selected job codes, it will deduct from this bank. Once you've assigned the appropriate
job codes, click Next.
6. Select whether or not the amount of hours accrued will cap. An accrual cap is a point when the bank stops
counting hours. Besides not capping accruals, there are two options:
n Hours Accrued: Accruals will not post for that period if the amount of hours accrued reach the cap.
This doesn't take into account hours used in the week being closed, so if an employee is capped at
100 hours and uses 8 the week that the accruals will post, the cap will still see 100 hours and not
post any more hours to this bank.
n
Hours Remaining: This option takes into account the amount of hours used, and will post accruals
as long as that employee has hours remaining under the cap. In the previous example, the
employee would be left with 92 hours. With hours remaining, the bank would see that the hours
remaining were under 100 and post accruals.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
124
7. Select when this cap will reset. If Entire history is selected, the cap will never reset. Otherwise, the cap
can be reset yearly on the hire date anniversary or a specific date.
8. Enter the accrual cap in the Cease accruing hours if hours exceed field.
9. Click Next.
10. Select when the accruals reset. If Do not automatically reset accruals is selected, accruals in a bank will
not reset. Otherwise, the accruals can be set to reset on the employee's hire date anniversary or a specific
date. If a reset date is selected, you can also enter in an amount the cap will reset to. For example, if the
amount is set to 30, the accrual hours will reset to 30 hours if the employee has more than 30 hours in the
bank. If there are less than 30 hours in the employee's bank, the amount will stay the same.
11. Click Finish to save the Accrual Bank.
Example:
Rob is ready to create his Accrual Bank. After clicking Add and typing in a description, he will click Next. Here,
he will assign his Vacation and Personal job codes to this bank. This means that employees can use the time
accrued in this bank towards either of those job codes.
After clicking Next, Rob can select when the accruals cap. Company policy dictates that the maximum amount of
time an employee can have for vacation or personal time is six weeks, so Rob will set the cap to Hours Remain
ing and enter 240 hours in the Cease accruing hours if hours exceed field. He would then click Next.
Rob's company does not reset accruals, but if they did, he would select when the hours reset and to what amount.
Since he is not using this option, he is just going to click Finish to create the bank.
Assigning an Accrual Bank to an Employee
Once an Accrual Bank has been created, it must be assigned to an employee.
1. Select an employee in Individual Hours.
2. Select the Leave tab.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
125
3. Click Assign and select the bank(s) you'd like to assign to the employee.
4. Click on the
icon to customize this bank for the employee.
5. Click Save to commit the changes.
Company
Close Week
The Close Week section is where you will close the TimeClock Week. Closing the week is an essential function of
TimeClock Plus® as it commits the hours worked to the database, as well as performs behind-the-scenes cal
culations for accruals, absences, tardies, and cumulative totals. In addition, employees will be unable to clock in
if the TimeClock Week is 56 days (8 weeks) from the current date.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
126
Closing a Week
1. Select Close Week from the Hours menu.
2. Click on Close Week to close the current TimeClock Week.
3. If there were no errors in the close week process, the current week in the upper right hand corner of the
program will reflect the new week.
4. If you receive an error, reference the Frequent Errors section below.
Unclosing a Week
If you need to access a week that has already been closed, you can unclose the week. Unclosing a week will revert
all the calculations made (such as accruals and absences) to the amount in the previous week.
1. Select Close Week from the Hours menu.
2. Click on Undo Close Week to revert TimeClock Plus to the previous week.
3. If there were no errors in the unclose week process, the current week in the upper right hand corner of the
program will reflect the previous week.
Frequent Errors
There are a number of reasons a week may not close. When the software is unable to close a week, you will be noti
fied of the reason the close operation failed. Some of the more common reasons for failures are:
Unapproved missed punches: If one or more employees have missed punches that have not been approved,
the week will not close. See Group Hours for more information on how to correct missed punches.
Employees still clocked in: If one or more employees are still clocked in during the week, the week will not
close. See Employee Status for more information on how find clocked in employees to clock them out.
Unapproved shifts: If one or more employees have segments that require certain types of approval (e.g. long
week, conflicting segments, overtime, etc.), then the week may not close. See the Exceptions Tab in Employee
Profiles for more information on setting the various approval requirements for closing the week, and Group Hours
for information on approving multiple segments at once.
Prevent close week options: If one or more of the options to prevent close week operations is checked in the
Manager Tab of Company Defaults, the week will not close if that criteria is met.
Company Defaults
Company Defaults is where you will configure global options to meet the needs of your company.
Global Tab
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
127
The Global tab of Company Defaults is where you will configure settings related to calculating hours and
breaks.
Click on the to expand out a section, or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When you
have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
Display Options
Company Name: This is where you will enter the name of the company. This determines how the company name
is displayed for all users as well as on reports.
Refer to individuals as: This determines how employees (the people who clock in and out using WebClock) are
referred to throughout the software.
Refer to job items as: This determines how job items (the tasks individuals clock in and out of) are referred to
throughout the software.
Refer to costing items as: This field determines how cost items (specific tasks or work orders within a job) are
referred to throughout the software.
Refer to Accrual Banks as: This field determines how accrual banks (where employee paid time off is tracked)
are referred to throughout the software.
Tracked Fields: These options determine whether or not tracked fields are enabled for your company, as well as
what these fields are labeled as and how many decimal places are allowed when entering this information.
Time format: This determines how time is displayed within TimeClock Plus®.
n
Server Default: This is how time is displayed on the server.
n
Server Default Fixed: The same as Server Default, but displays the time using a consistent amount of
digits, such as 04:15 PM.
n
Hours:Minute (HH:MM PP): For instance, 4:15 PM.
n
Hundredths (HH.HH): For instance, 16.25 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 1: For instance, 1615 for 4:15 PM.
n
Military time 2: For instance, 16:15 for 4:15 PM.
Date format: This determines how dates are displayed within TimeClock Plus.
n
Server Default: (How the date is displayed on the server)
n
Month/Day/Year: (3/15/2016 for March 15th, 2016)
n
Day/Month/Year: (15/3/2016 for March 15th, 2016)
Hour Format: This determines how hours are displayed within TimeClock Plus. Hours can be displayed as
Hours:Minutes (HH:MM; e.g., 2:20 for 2 hours, 20 minutes) or Hours.Hundredths (HH.HH; e.g., 2.34 for 2 hours,
20 minutes). If HH.HH has been chosen, the dropdown box next to the hour format determines how many
decimal places the hours will go out to. Having more decimal places ensures greater accuracy when calculating
hours.
Rate precision: Select the desired number of decimal places for rates. For example, if an employee is paid
$16.5325, select a rate precision of 4.
Calculations
Calculate hours counting toward overtime but not earning overtime first: If this option is checked, any
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
128
job codes that are configured to count towards overtime, but not earn overtime will be calculated at the begin
ning of the overtime period.
Example:
If an individual who is paid overtime after 40 hours works 38 hours Monday through Thursday, then works an addi
tional 4 hours in a job code that counts toward, but does not earn overtime on Friday, then that individual will not
be paid overtime unless this option is checked. If it is checked, the 4 hour segment will be pushed to the begin
ning of the week for overtime calculation.
Include shift differential premium in base rate when calculating overtime: With this option checked, any
premium pay for shift differential will be included when the base rate is multiplied while calculating overtime.
Include shift differential premium in base rate when calculating overtime: If this option is checked, any
premium the employee receives from the Shift Differential module will be included in the base rate when cal
culating overtime. Otherwise only the base rate will be considered.
How do forced overtime segments count toward overtime: This dropdown menu configures how job codes
that are configured to force overtime are calculated when it comes to determining overtime.
Example:
If an employee who has overtime at 40 hours in a week has worked 8 hours in a job that forced overtime and 40
hours in a regular job code. How this will be calculated depends on the setting chosen:
n
Always counts: With this option selected, hours worked in a job code that forces overtime will count
towards that individual's overtime for the period. In this case, the worker will have 32 hours of regular time,
and 16 hours of overtime.
n
Never counts: With this option selected, hours worked in a job code that forces overtime will not count
towards the individual's overtime for the period. In this case, the worker will have 40 hours of regular time,
and 8 hours of overtime.
n
Use job code settings: With this option selected, the way the overtime will be calculated will depend on
the settings for the individual job codes.
How many hours constitute a day worked: Enter the minimum amount of time needed to work in a segment
for it to be considered a day worked. For example, if you do not want to consider an employee having worked
that day until they have worked 30 minutes, you would enter 0:30 into the box. Check the Include non-clock
able hours if you want non-clockable job codes to count towards a worked day.
Maximum length of a worked segment: Enter the maximum length an employee can work in a single seg
ment. If you also want to restrict the amount of time that can be used on a single time sheet, select Also restrict
time sheets.
Bi-weekly/Quad-weekly base date: If you are using bi-weekly or quad-weekly overtime, accruals, and/or pay
periods, then you will need to set the first day of a bi-weekly or quad-weekly cycle here.
Pay period: This allows you to set how your pay periods are handled, for the purposes of the built in reporting
date ranges.
Breaks
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
129
The Breaks section is where you will configure the types of breaks your company uses. You can configure up to
five different types of breaks, though configuring each type will follow the same instructions
Configuring Breaks
1. Select the Active checkbox. Employees can only use active break types.
2. Enter in the name of the break in Break type. This is what the employee will see when they go on break.
3. Configure the lengths of time that will be considered a long break or short break in their respective
fields.
n
Short breaks are breaks that are too short to be considered a full break. For instance, if you specify
0:05 as your short break length, and an employee takes a three minute break, then the break will
not be counted as a break.
n
Long breaks are the maximum amount allowed for the time in between segments to be con
sidered a break. For instance, if you specify 0:45 as your long break length, and an employee takes
an hour-long break, then the break will not be counted as a break.
4. If you want to have breaks round to a certain amount of time, select Round breaks to nearest X minutes
and enter in the amount of time you want the break to round toward.
5. If you want the break to round up at a certain amount of time, check Round first X minutes up at Y
minutes, and enter in a time you'd like it to round. For example, if you set round first 15 minutes up at 8,
any time spent on break between 8 and 15 minutes would round to 15.
6. If you want additional rounding segments to round at a different time, check Round other 15 minutes
up at Y minutes. For example, if you wanted additional 15 minute segments to round up at 10 minutes,
any time on break between 8 and 15 minutes would round to 15, then anytime between 16 and 24
minutes would round to 15, and 25-30 minutes would round to 30.
Maximum Break Length: This is the amount of minutes an employee can take on a break and still have it be con
sidered a break rather than a clock out. This number can be set as anything between 1 and 240 minutes.
The Automatic Break Preference determines what type of Automatic Break will take precedence if both types
of automatic breaks apply to a segment. Select Shift based or Time of day based to determine what type of
Automatic Break will be applied.
Cost Code Items
Cost Code Status Names: Each cost code can be marked as having up to ten different statuses. By default, these
are referred to as "Stages," but here you can rename them according to your organization's preferences.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
130
User defined field names: Each cost code also has four user defined check boxes. The name used for each of
these boxes can be changed here.
Cost Code Level Names:Each cost code can consist of up to five levels. If you would like to refer to the levels as
something else, you can change them here.
Cost Code Groups: These settings determine what cost codes an employee is allowed to use when clocking into
a job code that is restricted by group. Intersection will include cost codes that apply to both groups, and Union
will include cost codes that are in either group.
Password Policy
The Password Policy feature lets you define minimum requirements for user passwords. Each password can be
configured separately. To edit a password, click on the
icon. Passwords can be required to have a certain num
ber of lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers, and special symbols.
TIP: Please note that if any password requirements have been entered, you must enter in a maximum
length for the password that must be at least as long as the total amount of required characters.
Time Settings
This is where you can select the method for displaying the current time. By default, time will be displayed as per
the database server. Different methods for displaying time can be selected from Time retrieval method:
n
Use database server time with no adjustments: This method will simply use the time on the database
server.
n
Use database server time adjusted to a particular time zone: This method will use the time on the
database server but will adjust it for a specific time zone (selected from the Time zone dropdown). This is
often used in situations where the database server is located in another time zone from the organization
itself.
n
Use application server time (not recommended): This method uses the time on the client computer
rather than the computer where the database runs. Due to the potential for abuse by employees, it is
strongly recommended that this option not be used.
Mail Settings
These settings allow you to configure how TimeClock Plus interacts with your e-mail server. This is required for
any utilities in TimeClock Plus that send e-mails to users and employees.
SMTP Server: This is the name or IP address of your SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number: The port number for SMTP traffic.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
131
Enable encryption (TLS): Checking this box enables Transport Layer Security (if enabled for your mail server).
Outbound server requires authentication: Check this box if the outbound server requires authentication.
User ID and Password: If authentication is required, enter your network user name and password.
Test e-mail address: This allows you to test the mail server settings by entering in an email address and pass
word, and clicking the Test e-mail settings button.
Manager Tab
The Manager tab in Company Defaults is where you can edit settings related to TimeClock Manager.
Accruals
Accruals post on the ____ day of the week: This option determines when accruals post when the week is
closed. For example, if this option is set to post on Saturday, then any time an accrual rule will post hours to a bank,
the hours will post on the Saturday of the closing week.
Do not post accruals for individuals marked as suspended: When this option is checked, accruals will not
post for suspended individuals.
Do not post accruals for individuals past the termination date: When this option is checked, accruals will
not post for individuals once the system date passes their termination date.
Do not post accruals prior to hire date: When this option is checked, accruals will not post until the system
base date has passed the employee's hire date.
View Options: These options determine the ranges in which employees can view their accrual information:
n
View entire history: The individual's complete accrual history will be displayed.
n
View from a specific date: The individual's accruals will only be displayed from the date selected here.
n
View from individual's hire date: The individual's accruals will only be displayed from the individual's
hire date.
n
View remaining balances only: Individuals will only see their remaining accrual balances.
Employee Entry
By default, when you create a new employee, you will be required to enter their first and last name. If you would
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
132
like to require additional information when creating a new employee, check the relevant box under Employee
Entry.
Add Employee
Schedule a review ___ day(s) after hire date when a new individual is added: When you add an
employee to the system and specify a hire date, then the system will schedule a review for that employee in the
amount of time specified.
Automatically grant current user access to all individuals added by this user: This option will auto
matically assign access to all employees a user creates, in cases where a user may have limited employee access.
This can prevent potential duplication of effort.
Close Week
Prevent close week if active employee overtime periods have not ended: This option prevents weeks
from closing if the overtime period for an employee is still active. For example, if an employee is set to bi-weekly
overtime, the week will not close until that period has ended to ensure that overtime calculates correctly.
Prevent close week if employee could continue working segments in the week: This option will prevent
the week from closing if employees are still able to work segments. This will prevent a manager from closing the
week too early.
Skip pre-close error check when closing the week: If this option is checked, the software will make a quick
pass over the data in the week being closed to ensure that the week will close properly. If this option is
unchecked, the software will examine each shift in detail, which can lead to a delay of several minutes before find
ing out the reason a week cannot close.
Use default cost code for auto transferred segments that require a cost code: If this option is selected, if
a segment is transferred in for any reason without a cost code assigned to it, it will use the employee's default cost
code.
Segment Approvals
The Segment Approvals section contains settings for how segments can be edited with approvals. Each option
allows you to set conditions for Employee approval, Manager approval, Other approval, and approvals of shift
exceptions.
Clear the following if the segment is edited: This option will clear the selected approvals from a segment
after it has been edited. This requires individuals to approve edited hours again to ensure they are accurate.
Prevent editing of segment with any of the following: This option prevents editing of any segment after
the selected approvals.
Prevent deletion of segment with any of the following: This option prevents users from deleting segments
with the selected approvals.
Schedule Tab
The Schedule Tab allows users to enable the automatic transfer of any scheduled information. This is useful if
there is any time off scheduled for a far-off date outside the normal range for TimeClock Manager.
To enable the auto transfer option, place a check mark next to Enable automatic transfer of schedule inform
ation. Then you can set up when the schedule transfers occur by clicking on the Configure Processing button
and changing the time when the processing occurs.
After doing this, click Save to commit the changes.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
133
Client Tab
The Client tab of Company Defaults allows you to change settings related to employees using WebClock to
perform clock operations.
Click on the icon to expand out a section or click Expand All or Collapse All to show or hide each section.
When you have finished making changes, click Save, or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
The Client tab of Company Defaults allows you to change settings related to locations where employees will
perform clock operations and enter information, such as in WebClock or within clock devices.
Click on the icon to expand out a section or click Expand or Collapse All to show or hide each section. When
you have finished making changes, click Save to save your work or Cancel to go back to the previous settings.
General Employee Access
Select break type to use as break button text: This option allows you to determine the label on the break but
ton in WebClock. For example, if you have multiple breaks set up for Break, Paid Break, and Lunch and want the
button to read "Lunch", you would check this option and select Lunch from the dropdown.
Allow break button: Enable this option to allow employees access to the Break button for going on break. This
causes segments to be created before and after the Break in a single shift, rather than having two (or more) shifts
on the same day as it would by using Clock Out and Clock In to go on, and return from break.
Allow employee to change pin number: Enable this option to allow employees to change their PIN. If you
want employees to remove their PIN, check Allow employee to set blank pin number below.
Employee View Access
Allow viewing of hours worked: Checking this option allows employees to see the segments they have
worked by pressing the View button in WebClock or View/Self Service on a clock device. Checking this option
also makes the following sub-options available:
n
Allow approving of punches (WebClock only): Selecting this option allows employees to approve
their punches in WebClock if they are required to do so.
n
Allow viewing of entered shift notes (WebClock only): Selecting this option allows employees to
view shift notes that they or their managers have entered about their shifts in the View Hours screen.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
134
Allow viewing of schedules up to how many weeks: Enabling this option will allow employees to view their
schedule as well as their schedule for the number of weeks ahead as selected in the dropdown box.
Allow viewing of messages: Enabling this option will allow employees to view messages when performing
clock operations.
Allow viewing of last punch: Enabling this option will allow the employee to view the last punch performed. If
you use rounding and would like the employee to see the actual time clocked in, check Display actual times
instead of rounded.
Miscellaneous
Display employee ID when performing a clock operation: Enabling this option displays an additional
prompt to confirm the employee ID and name. This can be used to keep employees from accidentally clocking in
with a similar employee ID.
Prevent clock in if a conflict exists: If this option is enabled, employees will not be able to clock in if there is a
conflict with an existing segment. If this option is unchecked, the software will allow the employee to clock in, and
will flag the segments as conflicting.
Round to the minute if not already rounded to schedule: If this option is enabled, clock operations will be
rounded to the nearest minute if the employee is not already set up to have their clock operations round to their
schedule.
Allow time sheet entry up to __ day(s) in the future and __ day(s) in the past: This option determines
how many days from the current date an employee can enter a time sheet using WebClock, provided they have
the proper permissions.
Display employee ID when performing a clock operation: Selecting this option displays an additional
prompt confirming the employee ID and name. This can be used to keep employees from accidentally clocking in
with a similar employee ID.
Prevent clock in if a conflict exists: If this option is selected, employees will not be able to clock in if there is a
conflict with an existing segment. If this option is unchecked, the software will allow the employee to clock in, and
will flag the segments as conflicting.
Perform automatic rounding if not already rounded to schedule: If this option is enabled, clock operations
will be rounded to the nearest minute if the employee is not already set up to have their clock operations round to
their schedule.
Allow time sheet entry up to __ day(s) in the future and __ day(s) in the past: Selecting this option
determines how many days from the current date an employee can enter a time sheet through WebClock or
through a clock device, provided they have the proper permissions.
Missed Punches
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
135
Missed punches occur when an employee performs a clock operation they are already on file as having done. For
example, if an employee forgets to clock in after lunch and attempts to clock out at the end of the day, there will
be a missed punch because the last clock operation was already a clock out. There are four company-wide settings
for missed punches. Also In-punches and Out-punches can both be set independently.
n
Deny clock in/out until the punch is corrected: These options will not allow the employee to perform
the clock operation until a manager corrects the missed punch.
n
Record a blank time in/out and flag as a missed punch: These options create a blank time for the
missed punch and allow the employee to perform the clock operation. The time of the missed punch must
be entered before the week can be closed.
n
Record the schedule time in/out (if available) and flag as a missed punch: If the employee is work
ing on a schedule, this option records the time they were supposed to clock in or out, and allows the
employee to perform their clock operation.
n
Allow the employee to enter the time in/out and flag it as a missed punch: This option allows the
employee to enter in the time that they were supposed to clock in or out, and flags it as a missed punch.
Allow the employee to enter a note for the missed punch: This option allows employees to enter in a note
about their missed punch. If you would like to require the employee to enter in a note, select Require the
employee to enter the note.
Allow the employee to enter a note for the missed punch: This option allows employees to enter a note
about the missed punch. Select Require the employee to enter the note to force this option.
Enter missed punches for segments exceeding: This allows the system to automatically create a blank Missed
Out Punch for any clocked in segments that exceed a certain time limit. The automation to manage this is set up
via the Configure Processing button.
Employee ID Preference
These options allow you to determine how employees will log into WebClock or clock devices.
Employee ID only: The employee can only log in using their Employee ID number.
Badge number only: The employee can only log in using their badge number.
Employee ID and then badge number: The employee can log in using their Employee ID or badge number,
and the system will look at all available employee ID numbers before looking at badge numbers.
Badge number and then Employee ID: The employee can log in using their badge number or Employee ID,
and the system will look at all available badge numbers before looking at employee ID numbers.
Request Entry
These options pertain to how Requests are entered by employees and users in TimeClock Plus®.
Allow entry of time-off request with unspecified leave code: This option will allow employees and users to
make requests without selecting a specific leave code. Note that all request segments must have a leave code
assigned before they can be approved.
Force unspecified leave code entry: This option forces employees to put in an unspecified leave code, requir
ing a user to manually assign a leave code before the request can be approved.
Allow entry of a description when submitting a time-off request: This allows employees and users to enter
a brief description of the time-off request. If Require a description to be entered is also checked, a description
must be entered.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
136
Send e-mail notification to individual's request managers when a pending request is removed: If email settings have been enabled, then this option sends an e-mail to the employee's request managers when the
employee deletes a pending request.
Send e-mail notification to individual's request managers when a request is entered: This option sends
an e-mail to the employee's request manager(s) when an employee or user enters a time-off request.
Minimum days advance notice required to enter a request: This option determines how many days in
advance from the current date an employee must enter in a time-off request.
Allow time-off requests that are up to how many days prior to the current date: This option determines
how many days prior to the current date an employee can enter a time-off request. Regardless of this setting,
times cannot be entered for closed weeks.
Request Days: These options allow you to set what days an employee can request off. When a day has been
unchecked, employees will not be able to make requests on that day of the week. For example, unchecking
Saturday would prevent any employees from entering time off requests for Saturdays.
Time-Off Request Default Times: These fields determine the default values for the start time and/or length of a
request.
Request Processing
These settings determine the actions TimeClock Plus takes when a time-off request has been approved or
denied.
Automatically assign hours on final approval: Selecting this option will automatically assign the requested
time off to the hours the employee has worked when the request is fully approved.
Automatically schedule hours: Selecting this option will automatically create a scheduled segment with the
requested time off in TimeClock Scheduler when the request is fully approved.
Approve and Deny Notifications: These dropdown boxes allow you to select how employees will receive noti
fication of their request approvals or denials: via e-mail, a TimeClock Plus message, both, or neither. In addition,
each message template can be changed by clicking on Edit Message.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
137
Custom Fields
Custom Fields are input fields created by the user to store information about employees or jobs that may not be
stored in TimeClock Plus® by default. For example, if you need to keep track of which of your employees are
registered nurses and which ones are licensed vocational nurses, you could create a field to keep track of the
licenses your employees have. Another field could be created to keep track of the date said license expires.
On the left side of the Custom Fields window, you will see a list of created custom fields. Please note that custom
fields created by modules will not appear on this list. You can determine what rules appear on the list by clicking
on Filter and selecting rules that only correspond to certain features or input types. Custom fields can also be
filtered by typing a name or number into the Search bar. Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will
revert the list to the previous settings. Finally, the list can also be sorted by several methods in ascending or des
cending order by hovering over the Sort button and selecting a method.
Once you have selected a custom field, the category and description of the field will appear in the header bar.
Types of Input
There are a number of ways a custom field can allow the input of data. There are also three Edit types, or ways to
determine how that data is entered, one of which must be selected regardless of input method:
Edit only: When this method is selected, the information will be typed in manually.
Item list: When this method is selected, the information will be selected from a drop down list of pre-determ
ined options. The wizard will also give you a chance to edit the items that will appear in this list, as well as the
order and default value (if any).
Item list with edit: When this method is selected, the user will have the option of selecting the information from
a drop down list or entering it in themselves. The wizard will also give you a chance to edit the items that will
appear in this list, as well as the order and default value (if any).
Besides selecting an Edit type, you must select an Input type. This will determine what information is entered in
the custom field:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
138
Text: This option allows text entry. Text can be entered as Alpha only (letters only), Alpha-numeric (letters and
numbers), Alpha-numeric (letters, numbers, and symbols), or Allowed characters. Allowed characters allows
you to type in the characters you would like to limit the field to. Note that if you want to limit the input to the let
ters A through J, each letter must be typed in individually. Typing A-J would only allow the characters A, J, and -.
The allowed characters can be viewed by clicking on the question mark icon next to the field.
Number: This option allows numeric entry. A Minimum and Maximum Valuecan be assigned. You can also
determine the amount of Decimal places used as well as enter a Default value for the field.
Date: This option allows you to enter in a full date (A month, day, and year) or select a date from the calendar drop
down.
Partial Date: This option allows you to enter in a month and date or select a date from the calendar drop down.
Time: This option allows you to enter in a time.
Custom Format: Selecting this will allow you to define the custom format by either entering in a Sample or cre
ating their own Custom format. The Custom format field allows you to define the characters used. It also allows
for the entry of unique stand-in characters:
n
> will allow the user to enter in alphabetical characters and forces them into uppercase.
n
? allows both upper and lower case alphabetical characters.
n
# allows numeric characters
n
& allows any printable characters (alphabetical, numeric, or symbols) to be entered.
n
\ makes the next character entered be treated as literal. For example, if you type in \A, the first character
will always be a capital A.
Creating a Custom Field
1. Click on Add at the top right of Manage Custom Fields.
2. Enter in the Category the custom field is under. This determines how the custom field is sorted in Man
age Custom Fields as well as what section it appears under on the relevant Custom Fields section/tab.
3. If the custom field should only be accessible by select users, check Private. This will prevent anyone who
doesn't have permissions to view private fields from viewing or editing the custom field.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
139
4. Select the Input method type and Edit type the custom field will use. Input method type changes the
characters the field can use. The Edit type is how the information will be selected. For more information,
see Types of Input above.
5. Click Next to advance to the next screen.
6. Select one or more features you'd like this custom field to be attached to:
n
Employee Profiles: The custom field will be attached to the employee. It can be edited in the
Custom Fields tab of Employee Profiles.
n
Employee job code: The custom field will be applied to the employee's assigned job codes. It
can be accessed by clicking the Custom button within the Configure Job Code screen on that
employee's Job Code tab.
n
Cost Codes: The custom field will be applied to cost codes. It can be edited in the Custom Fields
tab of Cost Codes.
n
Job Codes: The custom field will be applied to job codes in the Custom Fields tab of Job Codes.
n
Segments: The custom field can be edited for each segment worked. It can be edited by clicking
the Custom button on the Edit Segment window.
7. Depending on the input type selected, either click Next to advance to the next screen or Finish
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
140
8. For text, numeric, or custom field input, the next screens will help you define the field. For more inform
ation on how to edit this information, see Types of Input above.
9. Once the custom field has been created, click Test to make sure the field was created correctly.
Example - Creating a Text Custom Field
Breanna is a manager for Medcorp Clinics. When entering in her employees, she wants to make sure that there is a
custom field containing that individuals nursing certification. To do this, she will go to the Manage Custom Field
feature and click on Add.
She plans on creating a Category for multiple custom fields, so she names it Employee Information. She names
the custom field "Certification" in the Description field. She wants the certification to be selected from a drop
down list with the option to enter in a new certification, so she selects Text for the input type and Item list with
edit for the edit type before clicking Next.
On the Select Features screen, Breanna will select where this custom field will apply. Since this will only be used
for employee information, she will check Employee Profiles and click Next.
Now Breanna will select the type of validation used. Since she is just entering in acronyms, she will select Alpha
only and click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
141
On the next screen, Breanna will enter in the Max length of the field as well as select whether or not the text will
be forced into a specific Case. Since she is entering in acronyms, she sets the Max length to 10 and forces the
input to uppercase by selecting it from the Case drop down. After clicking on Test to make sure the input follows
the rules she created, Breanna clicks Next advance the screen.
On the List Options screen, she can create options for the list by clicking Add. She makes sure to click Show
none option for employees such as volunteers that do not have any certification. She creates options for medical
doctors (MD), registered nurses (RN), licensed vocational nurses (LVN), and certified nursing assistants (CNA). She
can determine how these options are presented by clicking the up and down arrows in the Order column. Once
she is happy with the options presented, she can click Finish to create this rule.
Example - Creating a Date Custom Field
Since Breanna's state requires medical licenses to be renewed after a certain period of time, she wants to keep
track of when her employee's licenses will lapse to prevent any delays in work. To track this, she is going to create
a custom field for dates.
Since she wants this field to be next to the Certification field, so she also types in "Employee Information" in the
Category field. This will include the custom field alongside the Certification field. For Description, she enters
"Expiration Date." Breanna will select Date for the input type and Edit only for the edit type before clicking
Next.
For Select Features, Breanna will select Employee Profiles. Since the date field doesn't require any cus
tomization, she'll click Test to make sure the field is set up correctly, then Finish to save this custom field.
Example - Creating a Custom Format Field
Medcorp Clinic's company policy dictates that each employee has an emergency contact. To create this, Breanna
will create a custom field with a customized format. She will include it in the Employee Information Category,
and create a rule with the Description "Contact number." For input type she will select Custom field and Edit
only for the edit type before clicking Next.
For Select Features, Breanna will select Employee Profiles and click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
142
On the Custom Format screen, Breanna will enter the format she'd like the custom field to have. Since she would
like to include phone numbers with area codes, she will enter (123) 456-7890 into the Sample field. Once she has
entered that in, the Custom field will read (###) ###-####, indicating that numbers can be entered in place of
the # signs. She can click Test to make sure the field accepts input correctly. She will then click Next.
On the final screen, she can determine if there is a default entry for this field. Since each employee will have a dif
ferent emergency contact, she will simply click Finish to create this rule.
Editing a Custom Field
1. Select the pre-existing custom field from the list on the left.
2. In the General tab, you can edit the Description and Category, as well as whether or not the field is Act
ive or Private.
3. If you want to change the type of field, click Edit to access the Custom Field Wizard for this rule.
4. Select the feature(s) this rule will appear in the Select Feature header.
5. Depending on what input type is selected, you can edit the different variables in the sections below
Select Feature. For more information, see Types of Input above.
Deleting a Custom Field
1. Select the custom field you'd like to delete from the list on the left.
2. Click on the Delete button in the information bar.
3. You will be asked if you are sure you want to delete this custom field. If the custom field has any inform
ation entered, you will see the exceptions and be asked if you want to deactivate this custom field. This is
recommended, as deleting the custom field is an irreversible process that also deletes all data entered into
the field.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
143
Other Configurations
Clock Configuration
The Clock Configuration feature allows users to create custom configurations that determine the features and
options that are available to an employee who logs in using WebClock or another client application. Saved Clock
Configurations can be assigned to employees on the Hours Tab of Employee > Employee Profiles, and to clock
devices via the General Tab in Clock Status.
Saved clock configurations will appear on a searchable list on the left. Selecting a clock configuration will display
the number of employees and clock devices that this configuration has been assigned to.
Adding a Clock Configuration
1. Click the Add button in the upper right hand corner of the screen.
2. Enter a Description for the new clock configuration. This is how the configuration will labeled when assign
ing it to employees or clock devices. Click Next to continue.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
144
3. Select which clock operations the employee will have access to on the Punch Settings screen, and click
Next to continue.
4. If you would like to restrict clock operations to specific job codes, check Enable job code restrictions
and click Assign to select what job codes the employee will have access to.
5. Select what other options you would like enabled for this configuration, then click Finish to save and add
the new configuration.
Operations
Allow clock in: This option allows the employee to clock in.
Allow clock out: This option allows the employee to clock out.
Allow break: This option allows the employee to go on break.
Allow change job code: This option allows the employee to change job codes (if more than one job code is
assigned to the employee)
Allow change cost code: If job costing is enabled for your company, this option allows the employee to change
cost codes.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
145
Allow view (hours, schedules, etc.): This option allows the employee to view their hours and last punch.
Allow time off request: This option allows the employee to make a time off request.
Allow a job code change into the same job code: This option allows the employee to change job codes into
the job code they were already working in. This creates a new segment.
Ask for cost code on job code change: This option requires the employee to enter a cost code when they
change job codes.
Ask for job code on cost code change: This option requires the employee to select a job code when they
change cost codes.
Default to last cost code used when clocking in: This option automatically selects the last cost code used
when the employee clocks in.
Restrictions
Enable job code restrictions: When checked, this option creates a job code filter for the employee. What this
means is that employee will only be able to perform clock operations in the filtered job code(s). Once this option
is checked, you will need to click Assign to create the job code filter for this configuration.
Options
Show employee confirmation on manual entry: This option shows a confirmation screen whenever an
employee clocks in with their employee ID. This screen confirms the employee's name as well as the date and
time, and requires the employee to acknowledge that this information is correct before allowing them to finish the
clock operation.
Show employee confirmation on badge entry: This option shows a confirmation screen when an employee
clocks in by using a badge. This screen confirms the employee's name as well as the date and time, and requires
the employee to acknowledge that this information is correct before allowing them to finish the clock operation.
Show pin entry if employee performs clock operation with a badge: This option requires the employee to
enter their PIN when clocking in using a badge for added security.
Auto select default cost code when returning from a break: This option automatically selects the assigned
default cost code when the employee returns from their break. Otherwise, the employee will be asked to enter in
the cost code they are working in when clocking in after a break.
Auto select default job code when returning from a break: This option automatically selects the assigned
default job code when the employee returns from their break. Otherwise, the employee will be asked to enter in
the job code they are working in when clocking in after a break.
Display actual punch times in view hours: If rounding is enabled for this employee, the rounded time for
each clock operation will be displayed in View Hours. If this option is checked, the actual time will also be dis
played.
Display totals in hours:minutes when viewing hours: When this option is checked, total hours worked will
be displayed in hours and minutes. If unchecked, hours will be displayed in hours.hundredths (e.g., 4 hours 45
minutes would be displayed as 4.75)
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
146
Manage Request Templates
The Manage Request Templates feature allows you to create predefined segments that employees can select
when requesting time off. This feature also allows you to define the default request period, which can be used to
limit requests made by employees to certain times or lengths.
Creating and Editing a Request Template
1. Select Request Templates from Configuration > Other Configurations.
2. Click on the green Add button to create a new Request Template.
3. Enter a Name for the new template, then click the blue Add button. This name will be how employees will
select the template when making requests.
4. You will automatically have the new template selected. The following aspects of the template can be
edited:
n Start time: This is the anchor time the requested segment will use. Check Employee can over
ride start time to allow employees to enter their own anchor times.
n
Hours: This value represents how many hours the request will use. For example, a request with an
anchor time of 9:00 AM with 8 hours will go through 5:00 PM. Check Employee can override
hours to allow employees to enter their own lengths.
n
Job Code: This field is the job code that this template will use. Check Employee can override
job code to allow employees to select their own leave code.
n
Description: This is an optional description for the template, for user referencing purposes.
5. Once the request has been edited, click Save to commit the changes made.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
147
NOTE: Any edits made to a request template that has already been applied to an employee will change
for the employee for future requests. Requests that have already been entered with the template will
not be changed.
Assigning Request Templates to Employees
Once a template has been created, it must be assigned to employees. To assign a template to an employee:
1. After logging into TimeClock Manager, select Employee Profiles from the Employee menu.
2. Select the employee you would like to assign a request template to, then navigate to their Hours tab.
3. Select the Request Templates section and click on the Assign button.
4. Search for the request template you would like to assign, or find it on the list of available templates. Once
you have selected one or more templates, click on the Assign button.
5. Click on the Save button to commit the changes made on the Hour tab.
Templates can also be added to multiple employees at once using Global Modification or Employee Roles, both
located in the Employee menu in TimeClock Manager.
Using Templates When Creating Requests
Once a template has been assigned to an employee, that employee can use it to quickly enter in a request. To use
request templates:
1. Have the employee log into WebClock and navigate to the Requests feature.
2. Enter a request by clicking on the plus sign next to a date.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
148
3. If more than one template is available, they will appear in the Templates table on the left side of the Add
Employee Request window.
4. Select the template you would like to use, edit as necessary, and click Save.
Shift Differential Module
The Shift Differential module allows users to create and assign shift schedules that modify employee rates of
pay. These shift schedules can be assigned to employees and will, when processed, modify the rate of pay the
employee receives.
In the examples below, we will be watching Jessica as she sets up TimeClock Plus® for Mercy Parks, a 24/7 clinic
that has established rate supplements for employees working the day shift, overnight, and on weekends. In addi
tion, working the overnight shift on Fridays and Saturdays automatically adjusts the employee's job code to one
tied to an accrual rule used to determine extra comp time.
Creating a Shift Schedule
1. Select Configuration > Other Configurations > Shift Schedules.
2. Click on the Add button in the top right to create a new shift schedule. Enter a new description name for
the schedule and click Add.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
149
3. A shift schedule will automatically be created with a 24 hour period split into two different shifts. In our
example, Mercy Parks uses a three shift rotation starting with a Morning Shift from 7:00 AM to 3:00 PM, an
Afternoon Shift from 3:00 PM to 11:00 PM, and an Overnight Shift from 11:00 PM to 7:00 AM. To create a
new shift, click on the Add button above the table of shifts.
NOTE: All shifts must add up to 24 hours and cannot overlap. If there is a period of time that an
employee would not earn a shift premium between two earning shifts, a separate shift with no adjust
ments will be created.
4. With the appropriate amount of shifts created, you can now assign start times for each shift. Note that the
end times will automatically adjust to form a continuous 24-hour period. To remove a shift, click on the
icon.
5. Click on the
icon to access the Edit Shift Definition window. Here you can manually assign a Shift
number as well as a Translated shift number (the number the shift will use in reports and exports. You
can also define a "grace period", or the amount of time an employee can clock in before or after a segment
to receive the shift premium. If you would like segments to be tied together in the break column, check
Tie this shift together with the next segment.
EXAMPLE: If the grace period is set up to allow employees to clock in up to 15 minutes early and have
their time be assigned to this shift, an employee can clock in at 10:47 and have that count as being part
of the overnight shift. If the grace period were set to 10, the employee's records would show that she
worked 13 minutes in the Afternoon shift before switching over to the Overnight shift. If the grace
period were set to 0, any time the employee clocks in before 11:00 PM would count as time worked in
the previous shift.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
150
6. Once the segment times have been set, click on the Rate Adjustments button to access the Rate Adjust
ment window. Here is where you will the amount the employee will receive for working in this shift. Rate
options can be set for the entire week, or for specific days.
EXAMPLE: Since Mercy Parks does not offer any premium pay for special days of the week, she will
select All days use same settings under Adjustment Settings. Since the morning shift doesn't
receive any adjustment, she will start by editing the afternoon shift. Here, her employees receive an
extra dollar for every hour worked in this shift, so she will select Base rate plus amount and enter in
1.00. Employees working overnight receive a 15% bonus on hours worked, so on that shift Jessica will
select Base rate plus percent and enter in 15.
7. Once your shifts have been defined, click Save to commit the changes made to this shift schedule.
Adding Job Code Adjustments
Occasionally some shifts will call for that employee to log that time in a separate job code. At Mercy Parks, Jessica
has set up a special, non-clockable job code for employees that work overnight on Fridays and Saturdays. In addi
tion to the premium for these shifts, this job code is tied to an accrual rule that earns the employee comp time at a
rate of 0.125 hours for every hour worked (essentially earning an hour of comp time for each eight hour shift). In
order for overnight shifts on the weekend to adjust to this job code, Jessica must do the following:
1. After selecting the shift schedule, select the Job Code Adjustments tab.
2. Select the Base job code you would like to modify. Only eligible shifts worked in this job code will be
changed.
3. Enter a description for the job adjustment, and select the days that this rule will process.
4. Select the shift you'd like to change job codes on and select the job code from the dropdown.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
151
5. To change the rates for that segment, click on the Rate Adjustments button. There are a few additional
options for the rate adjustment. Use individuals rate for job code will use the rate for the new job
code. Use default shift rate calculations will use the same rate calculations the employee would
receive in the original job code.
6. Click on the Validate button to check if all employees with this shift schedule assigned have the appro
priate job codes. Once you have validated your adjustments, click Save to commit these changes.
Enabling Shift Scheduling on Job Codes and Employees
To enable shift processing on a job code level, check Process shift differential in the Defaults section of the
General tab of Job Code.
NOTE: This will not change the process settings for employees that already have the job code assigned.
This setting can be changed for several employees at once through Employee > Global Modification or
through Employee > Employee Roles.
To set up job code processing on a per-employee basis, edit that job code in Employee Profiles. Select how you
would like it to process shift differentials by choosing Yes, No, or Follow Master (use the Job Code settings).
On the employee's Payroll tab, select the shift schedule you'd like that employee to use. Click Save to commit
these changes.
Manually Processing Shifts
Shift Differentials can also be processed manually. To process a shift without waiting for automation:
1. Highlight the segment you would like to process in Individual Hours or Group Hours, then select Pro
cess Segment from the Manage menu.
2. To remove shift premiums from one or more segments as well as unlink them, select those segments and
click on Reset Shift Processing from the Manage menu.
Contract First
The Contract First module is a companion to Employee Contracts. It takes hours in a job code that has been
applied to a contract and calculates them first.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
152
For example, a contract is created for hours in Job Code 2. The employee works 34 hours in Job Code 1 (8 on
Monday and Tuesday, 9 on Wednesday and Thursday) and 8 hours in Job Code 2 on Friday which causes the
employee to earn overtime (42 hours). Normally, without this module, the employee would earn overtime for the
shift on Friday since that shift put her over 40. With this module, the hours on Friday will be calculated first (since
they are contracted hours) and the employee will earn overtime for the shift on Thursday.
NOTE: If the setting Calculate hours counting toward overtime but not earning overtime first is
enabled, both contract hours and hours that count toward overtime but do not earn overtime will be cal
culated first by chronological order.
Configuring Contract First Module
1. Navigate to the General tab of Company Settings.
2. Navigate to the Floating Pay Period module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the entire organization.
4. Navigate to the Overtime tab of Individual Hours to enable this module for an employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
Automatic Breaks
The Automatic Breaks features is where users can create rules for automatically deducting breaks from
employee shifts. These are primarily used in situations where employees may not be able to clock out for a break,
or if the entire organization takes a break at the same time (such as a shop shutting down at noon for lunch).
There are two types of Automatic Breaks:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
153
n
n
Length-Based: This type can be divided into two sub-types:
o
At beginning of shift: This will deduct the break from the beginning of the employee's shift.
o
At __ hours into shift: The break will be deducted at the point that the employee reaches the
specified hour threshold.
Time-Based: At the time of day designated in the rule, the amount of time will be deducted from the shift.
Automatic Break rules are listed on the left side of the screen. Rules can be searched for by Description in the
search box, and the alphabetical order can be reversed by clicking on Sort.
When an automatic break rule has been selected, you can Delete or Rename it by clicking on the respective but
ton.
Adding an Automatic Break Rule
1. Click the green Add button at the top of Manage Automatic Breaks.
2. Enter in a Description. If you want to prevent the rule from occurring outside of a certain shift length,
check Apply to shifts between __ and __ and enter in the minimum and maximum lengths. This is use
ful to prevent employees who clocked in just before the rule from having the full break length deducted.
3. Enter in the break length that will be deducted, and select the type of rule you would like to create from
the Rule Type section.
4. Select the type of break you'd like this rule to use as well as whether it applies to hours worked, hours
scheduled, or both.
5. Click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
154
6. If you would like to restrict the times of day that this rule takes effect, do so by checking Restrict time of
day and entering a start time and stop time. An employee that clocks in between the start and stop time
will receive their automatic deduction.
7. If you would like to restrict the days of the week that the rule takes effect, check Restrict days and select
those days. The employee must clock in on these days to receive their automatic deduction.
8. If necessary, you can choose to Apply when shift contains multiple job codes or rates, and to Apply
when shifts contain manual breaks.
9. Click Next.
10. Assign what job codes will use this rule. Only job codes selected in this option will have the rule applied.
11. Click Finish to save the rule.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
155
Assigning an Automatic Break to an Employee
1. Select the employee you would like to assign Automatic Break(s) to from Employee Profiles.
2. Select the Hours tab.
3. Click on Assign in the Automatic Breaks section.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
156
4. Select the Automatic Break(s) you would like to include. Determine when you'd like the rule to begin or
end with the Effective Date and Expiration Date check boxes. Click Assign to add these to the
employee's rule list.
5. Click on the
icon to edit a rule's start and stop dates, or the
icon to delete the rule.
6. Click Save to commit the changes made to the Hour tab.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
157
Holidays
The Holidays feature allows you to define holidays for your organization. Holidays can be set up as one time or
recurring, and can represent time off or other days notable within your company for payroll purposes.
Holidays that occur on different dates each year (such as Election Day or Thanksgiving in the United States) can be
created as well as long as when they occur is consistent (such as the fourth Thursday in November).
Moveable feast dates (such as Easter) or holidays based on non-Gregorian calendars (such as the beginning of
Hanukkah or Ramadan) must be entered manually.
TIP: If you pay special premiums for time worked on holidays, then you can set up the special holiday
overtime calculations on the employee level via Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime Tab
(under Advanced).
Creating a Holiday
1. Click on Add.
2. Enter a Description for the holiday.
3. If the hours worked on this date will count as holiday hours, check Calculate qualifying hours worked
on this date as holiday hours. This will ensure that the holiday receives any special premiums as set up
on the employee level (per the tip above).
4. If the holiday is a one-time occurrence, select Single date and enter in the date. Otherwise, select when
and how the holiday recurs, then click on Save to add this holiday.
Created Holiday Examples
Creating a Single Occurrence Holiday
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
158
To create a single occurrence (such as giving the company a day off for a company picnic), simply select Single
date enter in the month, date, and year you would like to have the event occur. If your company also recognizes
moveable or non-Gregorian holidays (such as Easter or Yom Kippur) these will be entered in as Single date hol
idays.
Creating a Christmas Holiday
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
159
Christmas occurs annually on the same date (December 25th). To add a Christmas holiday, select Annually on
12/25.
Creating a United States Thanksgiving Holiday
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
160
In the United States, Thanksgiving occurs on the fourth Thursday of November. To create a recurring Thanksgiving
Holiday, select the First Thursday of November Plus 21 days (three weeks).
User Options
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
161
The User Options feature allows users to change their own settings. Any non-ADMIN user with proper access to
the User Options feature can edit some of their own information, such as e-mail address, log off delay, and pass
words.
User Options can be accessed by clicking on the user's name in the gray box at the top right corner of the soft
ware, and selecting the My Options link.
General tab
The General tab allows you to view your personal information, such as name and department. With the exception
of the user's e-mail address, information cannot be changed from this screen.
n
E-mail address: This field allows you to change the e-mail address associated with this user.
n
Log off after number of seconds: This option lets you change how many seconds of idling it will take
before you are automatically logged off. By default, this is set to 300 seconds (or 5 minutes) and can be set
anywhere between 15 and 900 seconds. When 15 seconds remain until you are to be logged off, a prompt
will appear asking if you would like to remain logged in. Click Ok or mouseover to refresh the timer.
Passwords tab
The Passwords tab allows you to edit your own passwords, as well as change the ADMIN access password (with
the appropriate permissions). The following passwords can be changed:
n
System Access: This password is used to log into TimeClock Manager and Scheduler.
n
WebClock Override: This password is used to override clock operations from WebClock (requires over
ride permissions).
n
Clock Edit Hours: This password is used to edit hours from a remote data clock device. Please note that
some clock devices may be limited to numeric input. On badge-enabled clock devices, a badge can be
used as the alphanumeric password.
n
Clock Override: This password is used to override clock operations from a remote data clock device.
Please note that some clock devices may be limited to numeric input. On badge-enabled clock devices, a
badge can be used as the alphanumeric password.
n
ADMIN: This is the password used to access the ADMIN account. As ADMIN has full access to the entire pro
gram, it is strongly recommended that access to the ADMIN account be limited to top-level users and IT
staff.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
162
Company Menu
The Company menu is where you will set many of the global settings for your organization. This menu allows
users to:
n
Close Weeks.
n
Set Company Defaults that determine how calculations behave, as well as which global settings will be
enabled.
n
Create Custom Fields for tracking extra information in the system.
n
Set Holidays for the purposes of calculating special overtime, as well as to see when a particular holiday
may occur during any given year.
n
Manage Automated Tasks, including Automated Imports.
New Entry
Modules
While TimeClock Plus® already provides plenty of functionality in the core product, additional modules are avail
able to meet the unique needs of certain organizations. This section contains documentation on these modules
and how to configure them to work within your organization.
Include Overtime in Regular Hours
The Include Overtime in Regular Hours module allows users to change how overtime hours are displayed in
reports and exports. Typically, if an employee is set to have weekly overtime at 40 regular hours, they will receive
40 hours of regular time and 5 hours of overtime. Using the Include Overtime in Regular Hours module, the
employee would receive 45 hours at their normal rate, and five hours at "half time", or half the hourly rate. The end
result will be equivalent to the standard method of calculating overtime, but the way the hours and rates are dis
played will be different
Configuring the Include Overtime in Regular Hours
1. Navigate to the General tab of Company Settings.
2. Navigate to the Include Overtime in Regular Hours module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the rest of the organization.
4. Select whether or not you would like to include these calculations in Reports or Exports by checking the
relevant options.
5. Navigate to the Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab to enable this module for an
employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
6. The module settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee cal
culates their floating pay period, navigate to Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab and check
Override Company Settings. Modify the settings as needed.
Automated Import
The Automated Import utility allows TimeClock Plus® to check a certain location on the network periodically to
import employees, users, or other types of information. This is useful for larger organizations where employee
status and information changes often, and it is impractical for users to manually enter this information.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
163
Once an automated import has been configured, the software will query a certain location at a set interval (such as
every 30 seconds) to see if an importable file has been placed there. If so, it will automatically import the inform
ation contained in the file and delete it.
Import Types
Cost Code Settings: This allows for the import of cost codes and cost code settings. Options for importing
include:
n
Field Delimiter: The character used to separate levels of cost codes.
Employee Information: This allows for the addition or modification of employees and employee information.
Options for importing include
n
Add Employee if they do not already exist: If this is checked, employees will be added if they do not
already exist. Otherwise, those lines of the import will be ignored.
n
Modify existing employees with data from the import file: This option modifies employee data
based on the contents of the import. If left unchecked, existing employees will not be modified.
n
Use next available ID number if an ID is not specified: If an employee is being imported and does
not have an ID number attached, this option will assign them the next available number. Otherwise, that
line will be ignored.
Employee Accruals: This imports employee accrual information, such as banks and hours used and remaining.
Employee Job Code Information: This imports job code assignments to individuals. Options for importing
include:
n
Add job codes if they do not already exist: If this is checked, a job code that does not exist in the cur
rent database will be created when importing
n
Modify job codes that already exist: If this option is checked, settings on job codes already assigned to
the employee will be modified. Otherwise, these fields will be ignored.
Employee Punches: This imports employee clock operations. Options for importing include:
n
Process schedule restrictions, Process hour restrictions, Process automatic rounding, Process
break rounding rules, Process restrictions for returning early from break: These options will apply
the respective rule or restriction to the segment when checked. If a segment is in violation of the selected
restriction, it will fail to import.
n
Process always uses default job code, Process always uses default cost code: These options will
always use the employee's default code, even if the import says otherwise.
n
Allow inactive jobs to be used: With this option checked, segments worked in inactive job codes can
be imported.
n
Allow non-clockable jobs to be used: With this option checked, segments worked in non-clockable job
codes can be imported.
n
Place imported custom fields in which shift segment: This determines if custom fields go at the
beginning or end of a segment.
Employee Rate Changes: This imports raises or other changes in the employees rate of pay.
Job Code List: This imports job codes to Job Codes. Options for importing include:
n
Add job code if it does not already exist: This will add the job code if it does not already exist in the
database.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
164
n
Copy custom fields when adding a new job code based on an existing code: With this option
checked, custom fields will be copied whenever the job code is copied from an existing code.
n
Modify existing job codes with data from the import file: This option will modify existing job code
data. If left unchecked, existing job codes will be ignored.
Schedule Segments: This imports scheduled segments for employees.
Users: This imports users into your database. If a role is not assigned, user rights will have to be setup after import.
Employee Segments: This option imports completed employee segments and any applicable rate changes or
approvals.
Setting Up An Automated Import
1. Access Automated Import from the Import/Export menu of TimeClock Plus.
2. Click on the checkbox for each type of import that you'd like to perform.
3. If you want to configure a specific type of import, select it from the list and click on Import Settings. For
more information on the various import settings for different types, see Import Types above. Once you've
configured the import-specific settings, click Next.
4. On the Data File screen you have the option of selecting a sample import file to create a map from by click
ing on Choose File. You can also Load a saved map setting.
5. If you would rather set up your own import map, select whether or not you are using a Fixed Length or
Delimited file. For the Delimited file, select the delimiter used to separate fields (usually COMMA), and
whether or not you want the process to Treat consecutive delimiters as one. In addition, select how
many columns you'd like to define, and how many records to skip. Once you are satisfied with your set
tings, click Next to continue.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
165
6. Map the fields according to your import type. Enter an Offset if you need to ignore a certain amount of
characters (such as leading zeroes). Once you have mapped the fields the import will use, click Next.
7. Set the Import interval (how often the software will look for a new file to import). If you want to log suc
cessful imports, check Include successful import in log and click Next.
8. Review the import specifications, then click Save. After the first interval has passed, a folder will be created
on the server where you can place information you'd like to import.
Using Automated Import
On the server, browse to the specified file location for Automated Imports
Copy an import file into the desired location (e.g. copy a .csv of employee information into the employee folder).
Once the next polling interval passes, the file will be imported into TimeClock Plus.
Viewing Automated Import Logs
Select the import type you'd like to view the logs for and select Show Log. The Auto Import Activity Log will then
display all log files related to that import. Here you can empty the window by clicking Clear Logs or Download
the logs to store elsewhere.
Automated Import Example
Jess wants to import cost codes for her organization. Since there are thousands of cost codes (one for each order
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
166
and task) and they change daily, it is impractical for her to enter them by hand. So she goes to Automated
Import and checks Cost Code List before clicking on Import Settings.
Jess' cost codes are split up by using the / delimiter, so she selects that and clicks Next
Here, Jess has the option of loading up a sample import file, or simply defining the type of import file and how
many columns there are. Since she knows it will be a delimited file with four columns, she merely enters in that
information and clicks Next.
Here Jess will create the map Automated Import will use to import her cost codes. The four columns she will use
are Full Cost Code, Budget Hours, Budget Dollars, and Export Code. Once she's done mapping these fields, she
will click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
167
Jess will pick how often she wants Automated Import to check for new imports. She is fine with the default 30
seconds and clicks Next. Finally, after reviewing the field assignments, she clicks Save.
Contract First
The Contract First module is a companion to Employee Contracts. It takes hours in a job code that has been
applied to a contract and calculates them first.
For example, a contract is created for hours in Job Code 2. The employee works 34 hours in Job Code 1 (8 on
Monday and Tuesday, 9 on Wednesday and Thursday) and 8 hours in Job Code 2 on Friday which causes the
employee to earn overtime (42 hours). Normally, without this module, the employee would earn overtime for the
shift on Friday since that shift put her over 40. With this module, the hours on Friday will be calculated first (since
they are contracted hours) and the employee will earn overtime for the shift on Thursday.
NOTE: If the setting Calculate hours counting toward overtime but not earning overtime first is
enabled, both contract hours and hours that count toward overtime but do not earn overtime will be cal
culated first by chronological order.
Configuring Contract First Module
1. Navigate to the General tab of Company Settings.
2. Navigate to the Floating Pay Period module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the entire organization.
4. Navigate to the Overtime tab of Individual Hours to enable this module for an employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
Daily Overtime Exemption Module
The Daily Overtime Exemption module allows you to define a shift or segment length at which point an
employee will no longer be eligible for daily overtime. This is often used to prevent employees from accidentally
receiving too much overtime as the result of a missed punch. The module can be configured on by segment or
shift.
NOTE: This module only affects how overtime hours are calculated in overtime methods that use Daily
Overtime.
Configuring Daily Overtime Exemption Module
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company > Company Settings.
2. Navigate to the Daily Overtime Exemption module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the rest of the organization.
4. Select whether or not you'd like to disable daily overtime eligibility for segments or shifts that meet or
exceed the maximum length.
5. Enter an Exemption threshold. This is the amount of time the employee must work in a segment or shift
(defined above) before they are no longer eligible for daily overtime.
6. Select which exemptions will still allow the employee to receive daily overtime:
n
Exclude segments that are forced to overtime 1: if selected, the segments that are forced into
overtime 1 will be excluded.
n
Exclude segments that are forced to overtime 2: if selected, the segments that are forced into
overtime 2 will be excluded.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
168
n
Exclude segments that represent 6th day overtime: if selected, the segments that represent
6th day overtime will be excluded.
n
Exclude segments that represent 7th day overtime: if selected, the segments that represent
7th day overtime will be excluded.
n
Exclude segments that represent holiday hours: if selected, the segments that represent hol
iday hours will be excluded.
7. Navigate to Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab to enable this module for an employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
8. The module settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee
receives daily overtime exemptions, navigate to Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab and
check Override Company Settings. Modify the settings as needed.
Employee Contracts
The Contract Hours calculation module allows you to create employee contracts. These contracts include a set
number of hours for each day of the year. Once assigned, the employee's time worked can be tracked in regards
to their contract, to ensure they have worked the contracted amount of time. Since very few employees will meet
their contract to the minute, the Contract Hours module tracks variance, so a surplus of hours can count toward
the employee missing or calling out one day.
Creating an Contract Templates
1. In TimeClock Manager, navigate to Configuration > Other Configurations > Contract Templates.
2. Click on the Add button to create a contract.
3. Assign a numeric ID to the contract, and give the contract a Name. If you would like to base this contract on
another pre-existing contract, use the Base On dropdown.
4. On the General tab, select whether or not all job codes will apply to this contract, or if only hours worked
in selected job codes will count towards contracted hours. If only certain job codes will count, select the
Default Job Code from the dropdown, and Assign any additional job code items.
5. Navigate to the Contract Hours tab to assign hours to the contract. Each day can have a certain amount of
hours assigned to it.
6. Since many contracts will run for months, if not years, it may not be practical to assign all hours manually. To
do so, click on the Manage button and select Copy. Configure a Source date range (the days you'd like to
copy) and a Destination range (the dates you'd like to copy to. In addition, select if you would like to per
form a Linear Copy (where the first day from the source copies to the first day of the destination) or Day
to Day Copy (where the first Monday will copy to the first Monday of the destination, and so on). Days can
be cleared in the destination range by checking Clear in Destination if Not Scheduled in Source.
Once you have previewed the copy operation to make sure the hours will copy correctly, click Copy to
automatically populate those dates.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
169
BEST PRACTICES: Be sure to always click Preview. A Copy operation cannot easily be undone, so make
sure the dates match up before you click Copy.
7. Once you have configured your hours, click Validate to view the total hours of the contract. This can be con
figured to split up the contract by weeks, and will provide an overall look at the contract.
8. Once you are satisfied with the contract, click Save.
Clearing Hours from Contracts
If you need to clear several days of hours out of a contract without deleting them, you can do so with the Clear
Days option.
1. On the Manage Contract Templates feature, click on the Clear Days button.
2. Select the date range you'd like to clear hours from, as well as the contracts you'd like to clear these hours
from.
3. Click Preview to see which hours will be removed. If the correct days will be cleared, click on the Clear but
ton to empty hours from those days.
BEST PRACTICES: Be sure to always click Preview before committing any changes. A Clear Hours oper
ation CANNOT be undone, so make sure the dates match up before you click Clear.
Assigning a Contract to an Employee
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
170
1. Navigate to the Contracts tab in Employee > Employee Profiles.
2. Click on the Assign button to select the contract(s) you'd like to assign to this employee.
3. Once a contract has been assigned, the hours can be edited by clicking on the
also be deleted by clicking on the icon.
icon. The contract can
4. Click the Save button to commit the changes made to this employee's contracts.
Flexible Time of Day
The Flexible Time of Day module allows you to set the time of day for your company for a time other than mid
night. For example, if your workday starts with the overnight shift at 10 PM, and your work week runs from Sunday
to Saturday, this module would allow you to start your work week on Saturday at 10 PM by setting the variance to 2 (10:00 PM).
BEST PRACTICES: Due to the nature of this module, it is STRONGLY SUGGESTED that the start time of
day be set once and left alone. Changing the time of day can affect payroll, accruals, and other import
ant calculations.
Configuring the Flexible Time of Day Module
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company > Company Defaults.
2. In the Time Settings section, click on the Change button next to Time Offset.
3. Read the warning about changing the time offset value. If you still wish to continue, click Ok.
4. Select the Time Offset you would like to use by the hour. Negative values will begin the day however many
hours earlier than midnight, while positive values will begin the day however many hours after midnight.
EXAMPLE: If your day starts at 8 PM, you would use a Time Offset of -4. If your day begins at 6 AM, the
Time Offset value would be +6.
5. Click on the Save button to commit these changes.
Floating Pay Period
The Floating Pay Period module allows you to calculate overtime for a defined period of time.
For example, an organization's pay period lasts 15 days and starts on Monday, August 3, 2015. 15 days later is
August 18th so the module would be configured to start on August 3rd with a 15-day pay period, and then over
time would be calculated from August 3rd to August 18th, August 19th to September 3rd, and so forth.
NOTE: This module only affects how hours are calculated for reporting or exporting and will not have
any bearing on flagging overtime in the Call List, overtime restrictions, or the Approaching Overtime
report.
Configuring The Floating Pay Period Module
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company > Company Defaults.
2. Navigate to the Floating Pay Period module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the rest of the organization.
4. Create a custom period by selecting the initial Period base date and Period length.
5. Navigate to the Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab to enable this module for an
employee.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
171
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
6. The module settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee cal
culates their floating pay period, navigate to Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab and check
Override Company Settings. Modify the settings as needed.
Forced Overtime
The Forced Overtime module allows you to force segments worked into Overtime 1 or Overtime 2 based on cer
tain days of the week.
Configuring Forced Overtime Calculations
1. Navigate to the General tab of Company Defaults.
2. Check Enable under the Forced Overtime section to allow weighted overtime calculations.
3. Select the calculation type you would like to use for each day of the week.
4. Enable any of the desired options below:
n
Override calculations for days that are marked as a holiday: This option allows you to over
ride forced overtime settings for days that are marked as holidays in the Holiday Calendar.
n
Override calculations for days that are calculated as 6th consecutive day overtime: This
option allows you to override forced overtime settings for days that are calculated as 6th con
secutive day overtime on the Overtime tab of Employee Profiles.
n
Override calculations for days that are calculated as 7th consecutive day overtime: This
option allows you to override forced overtime settings for days that are calculated as 7th con
secutive day overtime on the Overtime tab of Employee Profiles.
n
Include segments that are configured to not earn overtime: This option allows you to force
overtime on segments that are configured to not earn overtime.
5. Navigate to the Employee > Employee Profiles > Overtime tab to enable this module for an
employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
6. These settings can also be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee cal
culates their weighted overtime, navigate to that employee's Employee > Employee Profiles > Over
time tab, check Override Company Settings, and alter the settings as needed.
LDAP Authentication Module
The LDAP Authentication Module allows TimeClock Plus® users and employees to login using a password
from an associated user name in an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) compatible directory service.
Once configured, users and employees can log in using the same network login they would use elsewhere in the
network.
TIP: The LDAP Authentication Module requires a LDAP-compatible domain and authentication path.
Talk to your network administrator to determine if these have been set up.
Configuring the LDAP Authentication Module
1. Select the LDAP tab from Company Defaults within TimeClock Manager.
2. Select whether or not you want to configure LDAP authentication for users and/or employees.
3. Under Server Settings, enter in the Domain name used for LDAP authentication.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
172
4. Enter the location of your LDAP server in the Server field.
5. Test your LDAP settings by entering in a valid user name and password in the those fields and clicking Test
6. Select the Authentication method you would like to use:
n
Default authentication only: LDAP authentication will be disabled and the user/employee will
log in normally. If you'd like to match the LDAP authentication to the user/employee's Network ID,
check Set entry type to network id if authentication is successful.
n
Full authentication: The user/employee will enter their LDAP user name and password to log into
TimeClock Plus.
n
Partial authentication: The user/employee will use their normal login id to access TimeClock
Plus. However, once they are authenticated against the LDAP server, they will have to enter in a
password.
7. Click Save to commit these changes.
TIP: Once LDAP has been configured for users, all non-ADMIN users must log in using LDAP authen
tication.
Configuring and using LDAP Authentication for Users
1. On the General tab of User Profiles, enter the user's ID in the LDAP User Name field.
2. When logging in to TimeClock Manager or other apps, the user will either enter their LDAP user name and
password (if full authentication is selected) or their TimeClock ID and password (if partial authentication is
selected).
Configuring and using LDAP Authentication for Employees
1. On the General tab of Employee Profiles, enter the employee's ID in the LDAP User Name field.
2. When logging in to WebClock, the employee will either enter their LDAP user name and password (if full
authentication is selected) or their TimeClock ID and password (if partial authentication is selected).
Paid Break Limit
The Paid Break Limit module allows paid breaks to be limited to a certain amount over the course of a day.
Breaks can be assigned to one of four groups, with each group acting as a pool of maximum minutes the
employee can use for a paid break, even if they otherwise meet the criteria for multiple paid breaks.
For example, a job code is configured to pay up to 10 minutes for a break unless it exceeds 20 minutes. The Paid
Break Limit module is configured so the Break draws from Group 1, which has a 20 minute daily maximum. The
employee clocks in and later goes on a 16 minute break (paid 10 minutes). He later goes on an 8 minute break,
and gets paid 8 minutes. The next time he goes on a break, he’s gone 14 minutes. Only 2 of those minutes will be
paid because the maximum for the day is 20.
Configuring the Paid Break Limit Module
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company Defaults.
2. Navigate to the Paid Break Limit module.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the rest of the organization.
4. Check Enable for the Groups you would like to create limits for and define how many minutes within that
group can be paid under the Paid Limit column.
5. Under Group Membership, assign the different break types to one or more groups. Multiple breaks can
draw from the same group, meaning that they will both count towards the Paid Limit.
6. Navigate to the Overtime tab of Individual Hours to enable this module for an employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
173
7. The module settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change an individual's paid break limits,
navigate to that employee's Overtime tab and check Override Company Defaults.
Quad Weekly Overtime
The Quad Weekly Overtime module allows you to configure employees to have their overtime status calculated
on a 28-day (four week) basis. The base date for quad weekly overtime (the date from which each 28-day period
will be calculated) can be set in the Global tab of Company Defaults.
Configuring the Quad Weekly Overtime module
1. Select the employee you would like to configure in Employee > Employee Profiles.
2. Navigate to the employee's Overtime tab.
3. Select Quad Weekly Overtime as the employee's Overtime Type.
TIP: After selecting Quad Weekly Overtime, be sure to adjust the Overtime Settings to account for
the fact that overtime will be used when an employee hits that number of hours over a 28-day period.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
Salaried Non-Exempt
The Salaried Non-Exempt module calculates a regular rate of pay for each week so that it can be properly adjus
ted to an overtime rate for the overtime hours that are worked. It divides the employee's salary by 52 (weeks) and
then divides that by the hours worked to come up with a rate of pay.
For example, if an employee is set to weekly overtime at 40 hours, receives an annual salary of $50,000, and works
50 hours in a week, their weekly rate will appear as $19.23 ($50,000 divided by 52 for a weekly total of $961.54,
which is then divided by 50) with 10 hours of that receiving overtime.
NOTE: To view the specific wages the employee is estimated to be earning, run the Estimated Wages
Report in Period Reports.
Configuring The Salaried Non-Exempt Module
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company Defaults.
2. Navigate to the Salaried Non-Exempt module section.
3. Check Enable to turn this module on for the rest of the organization.
4. If you would like to round rates to the organization-wide Rate Precision value, check Round rates to
company specified precision after calculation. For example, with this option checked, an hourly wage
of 10.43761 would be calculated as 10.44.
5. Navigate to the Overtime tab of Employee > Employee Profiles > Individual Hours to enable this
module for an employee.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
6. The module settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee cal
culates their hourly rate, navigate to that employee's Overtime tab and check Override Company
Defaults.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
174
Shift Differential Module
The Shift Differential module allows users to create and assign shift schedules that modify employee rates of
pay. These shift schedules can be assigned to employees and will, when processed, modify the rate of pay the
employee receives.
In the examples below, we will be watching Jessica as she sets up TimeClock Plus® for Mercy Parks, a 24/7 clinic
that has established rate supplements for employees working the day shift, overnight, and on weekends. In addi
tion, working the overnight shift on Fridays and Saturdays automatically adjusts the employee's job code to one
tied to an accrual rule used to determine extra comp time.
Creating a Shift Schedule
1. Select Configuration > Other Configurations > Shift Schedules.
2. Click on the Add button in the top right to create a new shift schedule. Enter a new description name for
the schedule and click Add.
3. A shift schedule will automatically be created with a 24 hour period split into two different shifts. In our
example, Mercy Parks uses a three shift rotation starting with a Morning Shift from 7:00 AM to 3:00 PM, an
Afternoon Shift from 3:00 PM to 11:00 PM, and an Overnight Shift from 11:00 PM to 7:00 AM. To create a
new shift, click on the Add button above the table of shifts.
NOTE: All shifts must add up to 24 hours and cannot overlap. If there is a period of time that an
employee would not earn a shift premium between two earning shifts, a separate shift with no adjust
ments will be created.
4. With the appropriate amount of shifts created, you can now assign start times for each shift. Note that the
end times will automatically adjust to form a continuous 24-hour period. To remove a shift, click on the
icon.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
175
5. Click on the
icon to access the Edit Shift Definition window. Here you can manually assign a Shift
number as well as a Translated shift number (the number the shift will use in reports and exports. You
can also define a "grace period", or the amount of time an employee can clock in before or after a segment
to receive the shift premium. If you would like segments to be tied together in the break column, check
Tie this shift together with the next segment.
EXAMPLE: If the grace period is set up to allow employees to clock in up to 15 minutes early and have
their time be assigned to this shift, an employee can clock in at 10:47 and have that count as being part
of the overnight shift. If the grace period were set to 10, the employee's records would show that she
worked 13 minutes in the Afternoon shift before switching over to the Overnight shift. If the grace
period were set to 0, any time the employee clocks in before 11:00 PM would count as time worked in
the previous shift.
6. Once the segment times have been set, click on the Rate Adjustments button to access the Rate Adjust
ment window. Here is where you will the amount the employee will receive for working in this shift. Rate
options can be set for the entire week, or for specific days.
EXAMPLE: Since Mercy Parks does not offer any premium pay for special days of the week, she will
select All days use same settings under Adjustment Settings. Since the morning shift doesn't
receive any adjustment, she will start by editing the afternoon shift. Here, her employees receive an
extra dollar for every hour worked in this shift, so she will select Base rate plus amount and enter in
1.00. Employees working overnight receive a 15% bonus on hours worked, so on that shift Jessica will
select Base rate plus percent and enter in 15.
7. Once your shifts have been defined, click Save to commit the changes made to this shift schedule.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
176
Adding Job Code Adjustments
Occasionally some shifts will call for that employee to log that time in a separate job code. At Mercy Parks, Jessica
has set up a special, non-clockable job code for employees that work overnight on Fridays and Saturdays. In addi
tion to the premium for these shifts, this job code is tied to an accrual rule that earns the employee comp time at a
rate of 0.125 hours for every hour worked (essentially earning an hour of comp time for each eight hour shift). In
order for overnight shifts on the weekend to adjust to this job code, Jessica must do the following:
1. After selecting the shift schedule, select the Job Code Adjustments tab.
2. Select the Base job code you would like to modify. Only eligible shifts worked in this job code will be
changed.
3. Enter a description for the job adjustment, and select the days that this rule will process.
4. Select the shift you'd like to change job codes on and select the job code from the dropdown.
5. To change the rates for that segment, click on the Rate Adjustments button. There are a few additional
options for the rate adjustment. Use individuals rate for job code will use the rate for the new job
code. Use default shift rate calculations will use the same rate calculations the employee would
receive in the original job code.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
177
6. Click on the Validate button to check if all employees with this shift schedule assigned have the appro
priate job codes. Once you have validated your adjustments, click Save to commit these changes.
Enabling Shift Scheduling on Job Codes and Employees
To enable shift processing on a job code level, check Process shift differential in the Defaults section of the
General tab of Job Code.
NOTE: This will not change the process settings for employees that already have the job code assigned.
This setting can be changed for several employees at once through Employee > Global Modification or
through Employee > Employee Roles.
To set up job code processing on a per-employee basis, edit that job code in Employee Profiles. Select how you
would like it to process shift differentials by choosing Yes, No, or Follow Master (use the Job Code settings).
On the employee's Payroll tab, select the shift schedule you'd like that employee to use. Click Save to commit
these changes.
Manually Processing Shifts
Shift Differentials can also be processed manually. To process a shift without waiting for automation:
1. Highlight the segment you would like to process in Individual Hours or Group Hours, then select Pro
cess Segment from the Manage menu.
2. To remove shift premiums from one or more segments as well as unlink them, select those segments and
click on Reset Shift Processing from the Manage menu.
Substitute Module
The Substitute Module allows for the tracking of employees that will be filling in shifts for regularly scheduled
employees. It is commonly used in a school setting, but can have other applications where absences may need to
be filled by qualified professionals.
The substitute module is configured primarily on the job code level. A job code can be set to require a teacher ID,
as well as determine what types of subs and locations are allowed to use this code. A subbed-for employee can
then be configured with an employee type and a location.
Configuring Substitute Job Codes
1. Select the job code you want to configure for use by substitutes in Configuration > Job Codes, then nav
igate to the Custom Fields tab.
2. Under the Substitute Module section header, select Yes for the Ask for ID field.
3. Click on the Edit button to configure the Allowed Employee Types for this job code. Employee types are
created here by naming a type and clicking Add. Select one or more employee types to allow, and click on
Select to add these to the list.
4. If you wish to disallow certain employee types from use with this job code, click the Edit button next to the
Disallowed Employee Types field and add employee types via the Select button.
5. Click on the Edit button to configure the Allowed Campus/Locations for this job code. Locations are cre
ated here by naming the type and clicking Add. Select one or more locations to allow, and click on Select
to add these to the list.
6. If you wish to disallow certain campuses/locations from use with this job code, click the Edit button next to
the Disallowed Campuses/Locations field and add campuses/locations via the Select button.
7. Click on the Save button to commit the changes to the job code.
8. If you have not done so already, browse to Employee > Employee Profiles > Jobs Tab for a substitute
employee, Assign the relevant substitute job code(s), and Save.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
178
Configuring Subbed-For Employees
1. Browse to Employee > Employee Profiles, select an employee who can be subbed for, then navigate to
the Custom Fields tab.
2. Select the employee's Employee Type and Campus/Location from the dropdown menu, then click
Save to commit these changes.
Clocking in as a Substitute
1. Log in and select Clock In.
2. Select the relevant substitute job code.
3. The system will check employee types and/or locations to create a list of employees you can substitute for.
Select the desired employee and finish clocking in.
Weighted Overtime
The Weighted Overtime module adjusts hourly rates worked during the pay period by using weighted rate cal
culations to redistribute overtime hours into job codes worked.
Configuring Weighted Overtime Calculations
1. Navigate to the Global tab of Company > Company Defaults.
2. Check Enable under the Weighted Overtime section to allow weighted overtime calculations.
NOTE: In the calculations below, RegRate refers to the regular weighted rate, OTRate refers to the over
time weighted rate, and Factor refers to the number you are multiplying your time by in the event of
overtime (e.g. time and a half has a factor of 1.5).
3. Select the method you would like to use for weighted overtime calculations:
n
Weighted Base Rate: All Wages/All Hours OT Rate=RegRate x Factor: This option will cause
all base rates for all shifts to be averaged together, and then that averaged base rate will be applied
to all shifts. This means that it adds All wages and divides them by All hours to obtain the
Weighted Base Rate. This new Weighted Base Rate is then applied to all shifts in the period,
and all other calculations are run as normal. This means that overtime will be calculated for the same
shifts it normally would have been, but the overtime will be calculated based on the new
Weighted Base Rate times the Overtime Factor, as opposed to the normal base rate.
n
Weighted Overtime Rate: RegRate=No Change OTRate=RegRate+(Weighted Factor): This
option will cause the base rates to remain unchanged, but the overtime rates will be affected by
the module. The weighted factor can be found by finding the weighted base rate (using the all
wages/all hours formula), and multiplying it times (factor - 1). This weighted factor would then be
added back onto the regular rate to come out with the final overtime rate.
For example, 20 hours are worked in a job code with a rate of $10.00/hour, and 20 hours are
worked in a job code with a rate of $12.00/hour. The weighted base rate is $11.00/hour, which you
would then multiply times (factor minus 1). If your overtime factors are 1.5 (time and a half) and 2.0
(double time), then the overtime 1 multiplier would be .5 (1.5 minus 1) and the overtime 2 mul
tiplier would be 1 (2 minus 1). With the above situation, $11.00 x .5 = $5.50, which is your weighted
factor for overtime 1. Add this back into the regular rates, and you would have $15.50 for hours
worked with the $10.00 rate, and $17.50 for hours worked with the $12.00 rate.
NOTE: Regular rates will never change when using this method. Only the employee's
overtime rates will be affected.
n
Weighted Overtime Rate: RegRate=No Change OTRate=RegRate+(Weighted Base x
Factor): This option will cause the base rates to remain unchanged, but the overtime rates will be
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
179
affected by the module. The weighed factor can be found by finding the weighted base rate (using
the all wages/all hours formula), and multiplying it times the factor.
Using the same example used above, 20 hours are worked in a job code with a rate of $10.00/hour,
and 20 hours are worked in a job code with a rate of $12.00/hour. The weighted base rate is
$11.00/hour, which you would then multiply time the factor. For example, 1.5 is the factor for over
time 1. When we multiply $11.00 (the weighted base rate) by 1.5, we get $16.50. For double-time,
the rate would be $11.00 x 2, or $22.00.
n
Redistribute overtime hours to job codes worked: This option will determine total hours in
each job code, and then find the percentage of the total hours for the period that the job code
made up. Then, it will redistribute overtime into each job code based on percentage of the total,
beginning with the first shift worked in that job code.
For example, there are 5 shifts for 10 hours each. The employee attains overtime after 40 hours. The
first four shifts are in job code 1, and the fifth shift is in job code 2. Under normal circumstances, all
10 hours of overtime would be in job code 2, as those are the hours worked after the 40 hour
threshold was reached. When using the option to Redistribute Overtime Hours, 2 hours of over
time will be in the shift in job code 2, and the other 8 will be in the first shift worked under job
code 1. This is because job code 1 makes up 80% of the total hours worked, and job code 2 makes
up 20%, so 80% of the total overtime hours are considered job code 1, and the remaining 20% go
to job code 2.
4. Configure the following settings to customize your Weighted Overtime calculations:
n
Calculate on a weekly basis even if individual is bi-weekly or quad-weekly: This option will
cause each week’s Weighted Base Rate to be calculated individually, regardless of how long their
pay period actually is.
n
Process calculations when exporting data: This will cause export files to reflect the Weighted
Base Rate and all the changes this entails, as opposed to the actual rate for each shift and the res
ulting calculations from that method.
n
Process calculations when generating reports: This will cause reports to reflect the Weighted
Base Rate and all the changes this entails, as opposed to the actual rate for each shift and the res
ulting calculations from that method.
n
Include rate of pay when determining job code groups for redistribution of hours: This
option will cause job code groupings to be further split out if there are differing rates on shifts
worked under that job code. Using the above example, if one of the shifts in job code 1 had a dif
ferent rate than the other shifts in job code 1, there would now be 3 groupings instead of just 2.
The 20% for job code 2 would stay as it is, but now 20% should be separated out from the original
80% on job code 1 because this 3rd grouping uses a different rate.
n
Distribute overtime for shift segments that are forced to overtime: This option will cause
shift segments with forced overtime options in place to have that overtime distributed along with
the rest of the overtime. If this option is left unchecked, these shifts will not be included in the over
time total and will remain unchanged. Using the above example, if the first shift in job code 1 was
forced into overtime, it is now removed from weighted overtime calculations. 10 hours of overtime
is accrued because that shift is forced into overtime, and 50 hours were worked in that week that
caused another 10 hours of overtime to be accrued, as would normally happen. Only the second set
of 10 hours are divided up, and they are only divided up amongst the remaining 4 shifts. This
means that there are only 4 segments now, 75% of the overtime is divided into job code 1, and
25% is divided into job code 2.
n
Distribute overtime to shift segments that do not earn overtime: This option will cause shift
segments worked in job codes that do not earn overtime to take their percentage of the total over
time just as a normal job code would. This will not create more overtime; it just allows job codes
that do not earn overtime to take a percentage as well.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
180
n
Distribute overtime to end of distribution period first: This option will apply available over
time to the last segment(s) of the overtime period.
5. Navigate to the Overtime tab in Employee > Employee Profiles to enable the module for individual
employees.
NOTE: This module can be enabled for multiple employees at once by using Employee > Global Modi
fication or enabling it via Employee > Employee Roles.
6. These settings can be overridden on the employee level. To change how an individual employee cal
culates their weighted overtime, navigate to that employee's Overtime tab and check Override Com
pany Defaults.
Auto Transfer Schedule Information
The Auto Transfer Schedule Information module works in conjunction to allow users to transfer scheduled
hours within the open week period as hours worked.
Configuring Job Codes to Automatically Transfer
1. Select the job code you'd like to configure from the navigation list in Configuration > Job Codes.
2. Check Auto transfer hours from schedule during close week and click Save.
NOTE: This will only change the job code on the master level. To change settings for individuals that are
already assigned this job code, edit it through Employee > Employee Profiles > Jobs tab or via
Employee > Global Modification.
3. Navigate to the Company > Company Defaults > Schedule tab.
4. Under the Auto Transfer Schedule Information section, check Enable automatic transfer of sched
ule information to allow scheduled segments in the selected job codes to be processed.
5. Select Configure Processing to determine when you would like the transfer to take place.
6. Click the
ules:
icon to edit the existing schedule, or click Add to create one or more of the following sched
n
Once: The report will run and be sent once at the scheduled date and time.
n
Every X Minutes: The report will run every X minutes, starting from a date and (optionally) ending
at a set date.
n
Every X Days: The report will run every X days, starting from a date and (optionally) ending at a set
date.
n
Daily: The report will run at a set time on each of the selected dates, beginning on the first date
and (optionally) ending at the second date.
n
Monthly: The report will run at a set time on a certain day of the month. Optionally, and end date
can be configured here.
n
Yearly: The report will run on a set time and date each year until the optional end date is reached
n
First: The report will run on the first day of the week in a selected month plus or minus a set
amount of days at the specified time (for example, the First Monday of January plus 7 would run the
report on the second Monday of January).
n
Last: The report will run on the last day of the week in a selected month plus or minus a set amount
of days at the specified time (for example, the Last Friday of January minus 7 would run the report
on the second-before-last Friday of January).
7. Click Save to exist the Processing menu, and Save the changes made to the Schedule tab.
8. When the automation is scheduled to process, it will import scheduled segments in the selected job codes
as long as those segments do not conflict with existing worked hours for that employee.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
181
TimeClock Scheduler
TimeClock Scheduler allows you to build schedules for your employees, not only to allow them to know when
they are working, but also to help you plan and keep track of staffing for any particular span of time.
Logging into Scheduler
1. Log onto the Scheduler site (https://[server location]/app/scheduler/index.html) or select the Scheduler
icon from the bottom of another app.
2. Enter your User ID and password in the appropriate fields, and click Log On.
Schedules Menu
The Schedules menu of TimeClock Scheduler allows users to:
n
View Daily and Weekly Overall Schedules.
n
Create and modify Recurring Schedules.
n
Create templates for commonly used segments.
n
Add, Modify, Delete, or Transfer multiple segments at once using Global Scheduler.
n
Run reports on employees' schedule data.
n
Create Staffing Requirements to help you cover shifts on certain days.
Manage Schedule
Manage Schedule allows you to edit individual schedules as well as override recurring schedules to meet the
needs of your workforce.
On the left side of the screen, you will see a list where the first 100 employees will appear. Specific employees or
a different range can be set using the Employee Filter button. Employees can also be filtered by typing a name or
number into the Search bar.
Clicking the X button to the right of the search bar will revert the list to the previous settings.
The list can also be sorted by several methods in ascending or descending order by selecting your preferred sort
criteria.
Sort Criteria:
n
Employee ID
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
182
n
First Name
n
Last Name
n
Classification
n
Badge
n
Export Code
Once you have selected an employee, their employee information appears in the information bar. This bar shows
some basic information about the employee, such as their name and ID. Click the employee's name to view the
employee's photo, department, manager, and classification. This bar also features several buttons:
n
The Up and Down Arrows allow to select the previous or next employee on the list.
n
The Date Range boxes allow you to select the date of schedules to be viewed. A manual date range can
be entered, can be selected by using the date picker, or by selecting a preset range from the drop down
list. Once you've entered in a date range, click Update.
n
Manage: This button allows you to manage individual segments and shifts when selected.
n
Job Code Filter: This button allows you to access the Filter Job Code feature and limit segments dis
played to only the selected job codes.
n
Segment Filter This button allows you to filter segments based on type. For instance, you could filter to
see any recurring segments that are marked as On-Call.
Note that by default, Saturdays and Sundays will not be displayed. If there is segment information on Saturday or
Sunday, you will see Some segments are hidden next to the Display Weekends checkbox. In order to view
those days, check Display Weekends.
Adding and Manipulating Segments
1. Click on Add beneath one of the days on the schedule to access the Add Schedule menu.
2. Select the type of segment you would like to create for the day. There are several different types of seg
ments available for use.
n
Regular: A regular segment is one that is worked normally by the employee.
n
Off: An off segment is one that an employee will not be working, such as if the employee has
school or the shop closes down at that time.
n
Open:An open segment is one where the employee is not scheduled but is available to work.
n
On-Call: An on-call segment is one where the employee is not working but can be expected to be
called in.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
183
n
Unavailable: An unavailable segment is one where the employee is completely unavailable to
work during the time specified.
3. Create a Date and Time in as well as a Date and Time out for the segment.
4. If this segment ends in a break, select the Break type from the drop down menu.
5. Select the Job Code this segment will be worked under. In a Company Wide Recurring Schedule, this
will usually be set to Default Job Code so each employee can simply clock into their own job code.
6. Enter any pertinent notes about the shift in the Description field.
7. If you'd like to copy this schedule to other days within the week, select the number of days you'd like to
copy forward in the Days field. For example, if your week starts on a Monday and you want to copy this seg
ment through Friday, you would setup Monday's schedule, and select 5 in the Days field.
8. Click Save to create the segment.
9. To Delete a segment, select it then select Delete from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the
segment and select Delete.
10. To Copy a segment, select it then select Copy from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the seg
ment and select Copy.
11. To Paste a copied segment to another day, right click on the day you would like to add the segment to
and select Paste.
Manage Schedule Options
Scheduler Options contains settings for determining how segments are displayed in TimeClock Scheduler.
Scheduler Options
Default Period: This will change the period that is seen whenever you view an employee's schedule. For
example, if you need to consistently view schedules one week from now, you could choose Next Week.
Display job code ID: When this option is checked, segments will display the numeric job code ID.
Display job code description: When this option is checked, segments will display the job code description.
Display segment description: When this option is checked, a description given to a segment will be displayed.
Ask for confirmation when deleting segment(s): If this option is checked, you will be asked if you are sure
you want to delete a segment. Otherwise, the segment will simply be deleted without any additional confirmation
from the user.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
184
Daily Overall Schedule
The Daily Overall Schedule allows you to view the schedules of all employees working over the course of a
single day in TimeClock Scheduler. From here, segments may not be added, but can be edited or deleted.
Navigating Daily Overall Schedule
1. Access Daily Overall Schedule by selecting Daily from the Schedules menu.
2. Select the day you'd like to view by using the Previous and Next buttons, or by entering it using the date
picker.
3. Once you have selected a date with hours, employee segments will appear in the timeline. Segments can
be filtered by Job Code, Employee, or Segment type by using the appropriate Filter button.
4. Segments can be edited or deleted by selecting them and clicking on Manage. In addition, selecting a
single shift will also enable the option to View segment in Manage Schedules.
Daily Overall Schedule Options
The Options button in the top right of Daily Overall Schedule allows you to configure what information is dis
played in Daily Overall Schedule.
n
Start Time: This allows you to choose when the day starts for the Daily Overall Schedule. Please note that
this will NOT change the time your day starts within the company.
n
Hours: Change the amount of hours displayed in the Daily Overall Schedule. This is the amount of hours
that will display beginning from the start time. Hours can also be broken down into hour, half hour, or
quarter hour portions by using the dropdown menu.
n
Display open shifts by default: This will display all segments marked as open in the Daily Overall Sched
ule by default.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
185
n
Display on-call shifts by default: This will display all segments marked as On-Call in the Daily Overall
Schedule by default.
n
Display all segments for each individual on a single line (except open/on-call): With this option
checked, all segments (with the exception of Open and On-Call) will be displayed on a single line. Other
wise, segments will be displayed in order of when they start, so an employee with two segments in a day
may have them on different lines.
n
Display ID and description of job code: With this option checked, the job code ID and description will
be displayed alongside the employee's name and ID.
n
Display shift description: With this option checked, the shift description (if any) will display alongside
the employee's name and ID.
n
Colors: These options will determine how different types of segments are displayed in the Daily Overall
Schedule. To change the color for a certain segment type, select it and pick the new color. Once you save,
the Daily Overall Schedule will reflect your new choice.
Weekly Overall Schedule
The Weekly Overall Schedule allows you to view the schedules of all employees working over the course of a
single week in TimeClock Scheduler. From here, segments can be edited or deleted.
Navigating Weekly Overall Schedule
1. Access Weekly Overall Schedule by selecting Weekly from the Schedules menu.
2. Select the week you'd like to view by using the Previous and Next buttons, or by using the date picker.
3. Once you have selected a date with hours, employee segments will appear in the timeline below. Seg
ments can be filtered by Job Code, Employee, Availability, or Segment type by using each respective
Filter button.
4. Segments can be edited or deleted by selecting them and clicking on Manage, or by right clicking on
them.
Weekly Overall Schedule Options
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
186
The gray Options button in the upper right of Weekly Overall Schedule allows you to change several options that
determine what information the features displays
Sorting options: These allow you to change the primary and secondary sort keys for the weekly overall schedule.
The Primary sort key is how employees will initially be sorted; if there are two employees with the same sort cri
teria (e.g., two employees with the same last name), the second sort key will be used.
Display employee number: Checking this option will display the employee's ID number alongside their name.
Display employee department: Checking this option will display the employee's department alongside their
name.
Display employee class: Checking this option will display the employee's classification alongside their name.
Display last name first: Checking this option will display names in Last name, First format.
Display Job Code ID: Checking this option will display the job code ID that the employee is scheduled to use.
Display Job Code description: Checking this option will display the Job Code description that the employee is
scheduled to work in.
Display segment description: Checking this option will display the Job Code description that the employee is
scheduled to work in.
Display scheduled hours total: Checking this option will display the total amount of hours that employee is
scheduled to work that week.
Time format: This drop down allows you to change how time is displayed on the Weekly Overall Schedule.
Number of individuals to display: This option allows you to enter how many individuals you would like to dis
play (up to 25).
Ask for confirmation when deleting segments: When this option is checked, you will be asked to confirm the
operation when deleting segments for employees.
Normalize employee names: This option will normalize all names to Title Casing. This is useful for when employ
ees have been imported from different sources and may have different capitalization standards.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
187
Manage Recurring Schedule
Manage Recurring Schedules allows users to create repeating schedules for employees. These are schedules
for one to eight weeks that will repeat indefinitely (or until they reach a designated stop date). These schedules
can then be assigned to your employees, negating the need to create schedules for each pay period.
Many organizations use similar schedules for the majority of their employees. For example, if most of your employ
ees work 8 AM to 5 PM you can create Recurring Schedules to assign to all of your employees, rather than create
individual schedules. This schedule will repeat for as long as it is assigned to the employee.
Creating a Recurring Schedule
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Recurring Schedule.
2. Click on Add in the upper right hand corner.
3. Enter a Description (name) for the recurring schedule. This is how users will identify this recurring schedule
from the list when assigning to employees.
4. Select how many Weeks this recurring schedule will include. This determines how many weeks the recurring
schedule will consist of before repeating. For example, a two week recurring schedule assigned on February 1st
will repeat two weeks later, on February 15th.
5. Select whether or not you would like the recurring schedule to be active by checking the Active checkbox.
Inactive recurring schedules cannot be assigned to employees.
6. Click Save to exit the Add Recurring Schedule window. You should now be able to view the schedule in Man
age Recurring Schedule.
Adding a Segment to a Recurring Schedule
1. Click on Add beneath one of the days on the schedule to access the Add Schedule menu.
2. Select the type of segment you would like to create for the day.
n Regular: A regular segment is one that is worked normally by the employee.
n
Off: An off segment is one that an employee will not be working.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
188
n
Open: An open segment is one where the employee is not scheduled but is available to work.
n
On-Call: An on-call segment is one where the employee is not working but can be expected to be
called in.
n
Unavailable: An unavailable segment is one where the employee is not scheduled and is not avail
able to work.
3. Create a Date and Time in as well as a Date and Time out for the segment.
4. If this segment ends in a break, select the Break type from the drop down menu.
5. Select the job code this segment will be worked under. Typically in a Company Default Recurring
Schedule, this will usually be set to Default Job Code so each employee can simply clock into their own
job code.
6. Enter any notes about the shift in the Description field.
7. If you'd like to copy this schedule to other days within the week, select the number of days you'd like to
copy forward in the Days field. For example, if your week starts on a Monday and you want to copy this seg
ment through Friday, you would set up Monday's schedule, and select 5 in the Days field.
8. Click Save.
9. To Delete a segment, select it then select Delete from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the
segment and select Delete.
10. To Copy a segment, select it then select Copy from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the seg
ment and select Copy.
11. To Paste a copied segment to another day, right click on the day you'd like to add the segment to and
select Paste.
Editing a Recurring Schedule
Recurring schedules can be edited to change their active status or the length in weeks. Please note that the Com
pany Default recurring schedule cannot have its name or length edited. To edit a recurring schedule:
1. Select the recurring schedule you would like to edit from the list.
2. Click on the Edit button in the information bar.
3. Change the Description, amount of Weeks, or Active status of the schedule and click Save to instantly
apply these changes to the schedule and all employees that have it assigned.
Deleting/Deactivating a Recurring Schedule
Recurring schedules can be deleted, which will permanently remove them from the TimeClock Plus® database.
For this reason, it is STRONGLY recommended that recurring schedules that have been assigned to employees be
deactivated instead of deleted.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
189
To delete a recurring schedule, select it from the list and click on Delete. If the schedule has been assigned to
employees, you will receive the option of deleting or deactivating it. Select the operation you would like to per
form and click Ok.
Creating a Company Default Recurring Schedule
1. Enter Manage Recurring Schedule and select Company Default.
2. On the Manage Schedule screen you will see an area for Day 1, Day 2, etc. These correspond to your
TimeClock Week, so if your week starts on a Monday, that will be Day 1. By default, Saturdays and
Sundays will be hidden unless Display Weekends is checked.
3. Click on Add beneath one of the days to access the Add Schedule menu.
4. Select the type of segment you would like to create for the day. Generally, the Company Default recurring
schedule will only use Regular segments. However, you can create other types of segments as needed.
n Regular: A regular segment is one that is worked normally by the employee.
n
Off: An off segment is one that an employee will not be working, such as if the employee has
school or the shop closes down at that time.
n
Open:An open segment is one where the employee is not scheduled but is available to work.
n
On-Call: An on-call segment is one where the employee is not working but can be expected to be
called in.
5. Create a Date and Time In as well as a Date and Time Out for the segment. Note that the Date fields use
the day you've selected rather than any actual dates.
6. If this segment ends in a break, select the Break type from the dropdown menu.
7. Select the job code this segment will be worked under. In a Company Wide Recurring Schedule, this
will usually be set to Default Job Code so each employee can simply clock into their own job code.
8. Enter any notes about the shift in the Description field.
9. If you'd like to copy this schedule to other days within the week, select the number of days you'd like to
copy forward in the Repeat Days field. For example, if your week starts on a Monday and you want to
copy this segment through Friday, you would select 5 in the Repeat Days field.
10. Click Save.
11. To Delete a segment, select it then select Delete from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the
segment and select Delete.
12. To Copy a segment, select it then select Copy from the Manage menu. You can also right click on the seg
ment and select Copy.
13. To Paste a copied segment to another day, right click on the day you'd like to add the segment to and
select Paste.
14. Click Ok to save the Company Wide Recurring Schedule.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
190
Assigning a Recurring Schedule
1. Select the employee you would like to assign the schedule to in Employee Profiles.
2. Select the Hour tab and navigate to the Schedule section.
3. Click on Assign.
4. Enter the Start date for when you would like the schedule to take effect. If you would like the schedule to
stop being applied to this employee at a certain date, you can enter in a Stop date as well.
5. Select the Use company wide recurring schedule radio button, then click Assign.
6. Click Save to save the contents of the Hour tab.
Manage Schedule Template
Manage Schedule Template allows users to create, manage, and edit schedule templates. Schedule templates
allow users to quickly assign similar schedules across one or more days without having to manually create the seg
ments. There are three types of schedule templates.
Creating a segment template
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
191
Segment templates are a template that covers a single segment over a 24-hour period. These are commonly used
when creating templates that correspond with certain shifts, such as a morning or overnight shift.
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Template.
2. Click on Add in the upper right hand corner.
3. Select Create segment template as the template type.
4. Enter a brief Description (e.g., Mid-shift) for the template. If your organization plans on using several tem
plates, consider entering a Category for easy organization.
5. If you would only like this template to be visible just for your own user, check the Private checkbox. If you
would like this template to be accessed by other users, do not check this box. Click Next.
6. Create a single segment as you would in Manage Schedule. The segment can be assigned to a specific job
code, or can use the employee's Default Job Code to increase versatility in assigning the segment. Once
the segment has been created, click Finish to add it to the list of Schedule Templates.
Creating a day template
Day templates are templates that cover one or more days (up to a week). These are helpful when creating several
segments in a row, such as when an employee will work a three days on, two days off schedule.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
192
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Template.
2. Click on Add in the upper right hand corner.
3. Select Create day template as the template type. Select how many days the template will run from the
drop down menu.
4. Enter a brief Description (e.g., three on, three off) for the template. If your organization plans on using sev
eral templates, consider entering a Category for easy organization.
5. If you would only like this template to be visible to this user, check the Private checkbox. Click Finish.
6. Create the segments as you would in Manage Schedule. Segments can be assigned to a specific job
code, or can be set to use the employee's Default job code to increase versatility in assigning the template.
Creating a week template
Week templates are schedule templates that cover one or more weeks (up to 8 weeks). These are commonly used
when employees have irregular schedules that span multiple weeks.
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Template.
2. Click on Add in the upper right hand corner.
3. Select Create week template as the template type. Select how many weeks the template will run from
the drop down menu.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
193
4. Enter a brief Description (e.g. "28 Day Mid-shift") for the template. If your organization plans on using sev
eral templates, consider entering a Category for easy organization.
5. If you would only like this template to be visible to this user, check the Private checkbox.
6. Click Finish.
7. Create other segments as you would in Manage Schedule. Segments can be assigned to a specific job
code, or can be set to use the employee's default job code to increase versatility in assigning the template.
Editing a template
Segments and lengths of templates can be edited. Please note that these changes will not be retroactive, and will
only apply when this template is used in the future.
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Template.
2. Select the template you'd like to edit from the template list.
3. Click on the Edit button to change the template's Category, Description, Private or Active status. In addi
tion, if the template is a day or week template, the length can be changed here.
4. Segments can be edited as they would be in Manage Schedule.
Deleting a template
Schedule templates can be deleted. Please note that deleting a schedule template will permanently remove it
from Scheduler. For that reason, it is STRONGLY recommended that you deactivate unused templates instead.
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Template.
2. Select the template you'd like to delete from the template list.
3. Select the Delete button from the information bar.
4. You will be asked if you are sure you want to delete the template. If the template is public, you will be
warned that this will also delete it for other users, and be given the choice to deactivate the template
instead. Select which action you would like to take, and click Confirm.
Using schedule templates
Once you have created one or more schedule templates, you can begin using them anywhere that allows you to
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
194
create schedules. Segment templates can be assigned using the Add button, which will overwrite the values in
the Add Segment window with those of the template.
To use a day or week template, select the day you'd like the template to begin on, select the Manage menu, then
select Paste from Template. Here, you will see a sortable list of all templates and can select the one you'd like to
apply. After selecting the template and clicking Select, the template segment(s) will appear on that employee's
schedule.
Staffing Requirements
Staffing Requirements allows users to create, manage, and edit required segments. Required segments are
periods that require a certain amount of employees to be working in that job code.
For example, if the mid-shift at a hospital pharmacy requires at least five pharmacy technicians, a required seg
ment could be created. Then, if less than five technicians are scheduled to be working, users will receive a warn
ing letting them know that the segment is not sufficiently covered.
Segments that were created through Staffing Requirements will appear on Individual Schedules with an aster
isk.
BEST PRACTICES: Deleting a staffing requirement will permanently clear out the required schedule seg
ments created for employees. Therefore, it is STRONGLY RECOMMENDED that you do not delete a
staffing requirement if it has been used.
Creating a Staffing Requirement
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Staffing Requirements.
2. Click Add. Enter in a name for this requirement, and click Add again to create it.
3. On the General tab, create any Employee Filters or Job Code Filters that may apply to this requirement.
These filters will determine which employees are eligible for working during required segments.
n
To use the pharmacy scenario above as an example, you could use the Job Code Filter to include
only Pharmacy job code(s), and the Employee Filter to include only pharmacy technicians.
Creating Required Segments
Once a staffing requirement has been created, users can begin adding segments.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
195
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Staffing Requirements.
2. Select your requirement from the navigation list on the left.
3. Select the view you would like to see by clicking on the appropriate tab (Calendar, Detail, and Daily).
4. Click the Add button and create a segment.
5. On the Calendar or Detail view, the segment(s) you have created will be highlighted that reads 0/1
employees: 0% covered. Click on this box to access the Staffing Assignment window.
6. Define how many employees are required to work this segment in the Required Employees field.
7. Click on Assign to begin assigning employees to the required segments. Check the employee(s) you
would like to add to this segment. If the employee is not already scheduled to work in this job code, a seg
ment will be added.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
196
8. Once employees have been added to the segment, click Save.
9. The Staffing Assignments window will now reflect the employees assigned to this segment. The status
bar will show how many employees are required and assigned. Employee assignments can be removed or
changed by clicking on the icon in the Unassign column, and the
icon in the Edit column.
Global Scheduler
The Global Scheduler allows you to copy or delete schedules for selected employees. This allows you to copy
schedules that are unique to an employee to future weeks, as well as perform this operation for several employees
at once or copy those schedules into Individual Hours as hours that employee has worked. In addition, multiple
schedules can be deleted at once with Global Scheduler.
Applying a Global Schedule
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu, then select Global Scheduler.
2. Select the employees you would like to copy schedules for by either selecting specific employees from
the list or by using a Filter. Once you have identified the employees you would like to schedule, click
Next.
3. Select Apply schedules from the Schedule operations list, then click Next.
4. Select the Start date by entering the beginning date of the weekly schedule(s) you would like to create or
edit. Select the Number of weeks you would like to create or edit and click Apply.
5. Create the segment(s) you would like to add for the selected employee(s). Segments can be created by
clicking Add,copying already added segments, or pasting from templates. When you have created the seg
ments you would like to add to the selected schedule(s), click Next.
6. The Summary screen will provide a summary of the operation you are about to perform, including the
number of individuals affected, and the segments you are creating . Select Preview to view the copy oper
ation without making any changes to the schedule, or click Process to add the segments.
Copying a Global Schedule
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu, then select Global Scheduler.
2. Select the employees to be scheduled by either selecting the specific employees from the list or by using
a Filter. Once you have selected the employees you would like to copy schedules for, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
197
3. Select Copy schedules from Schedule Operations and click Next.
4. Select the Source date range by entering in the dates of schedules you would like to copy or select the
dates using the date picker.
5. If you would like to only copy segments from certain job codes, create a Job Code Filter.
6. Select either a Linear copy, or Day to Day copy.
n
A Linear copy will move the segments across without regard to the day of the week. For example,
Day 1 of the source schedule will copy to Day 1 of the destination range.
n
A Day to Day copy will move segments to the appropriate day of the week, so a segment that
starts on a Monday will be copied to each Monday in the destination range. If you would like to
copy blank days on the schedule (such as days off not marked as such), check Copy blank days.
7. Check the various options for different types of segments you would like to include. Click Next.
8. Select the Destination date range by entering in the dates of schedules you would like to copy, by
selecting them from the date picker, or use one of the preset ranges in the drop down list.
9. Select the different types of days you would like to overwrite by checking the relevant checkbox. Once you
have configured your destination range, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
198
10. The Summary screen will provide a summary of the operation you are about to perform, including dates,
the number of individuals affected, and the options selected for the source and destination dates. Select
Preview to view the copy operation without making any changes to the schedule, or click Process to copy
schedules as configured.
Deleting a Global Schedule
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Global Scheduler.
2. Select the employees you would like to delete schedules for by either selecting the specific employees
from the list or by using a Filter. Once you have selected the employees you would like to delete sched
ules for, click Next.
3. Select Delete schedules and click Next.
4. Select the Source date range by entering the date range of schedules you would like to delete, by select
ing them using the date picker, or use one of the preset ranges in the drop down list.
5. If you would like to only delete segments from certain job codes, create a Job Code Filter.
6. Check the various options for different types of segments you would like to include. Once you have fin
ished configuring the source dates, click Next.
7. The Summary screen will provide a summary of the operation you are about to perform, including dates,
the number of individuals selected, and the types of segments you will be deleting. Select Preview to
view the copy operation without making any changes to the schedule, or click Process to delete the sched
ules.
Modifying a Scheduled Segment
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Global Scheduler.
2. Select the employees you would like to modify one or more segments for by either selecting the specific
employees from the list, by creating a Filter. Once you have selected the employees you would like to
modify segment(s) for, click Next.
3. Select Modify schedule segment then click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
199
4. Select the Source date range by entering in the dates of schedules you would like to modify, by select
ing them using the date picker, or use one of the preset ranges in the drop down list.
5. If you would like to only modify segments from certain job codes, create a Job Code Filter.
6. Check the various options for different types of segments you would like to include.
n
Include schedule segments
n
Include recurring segments
n
Include recurring override segments
n
Include segments tied to requirements
n
Include regular segments
n
Include on-call segments
n
Include off segments
n
Include unavailable segments
7. If you would like to limit the segment(s) being modified to those that took place at a certain time, check
Include segments matching.
n
Check Time in and time out match exact range if you would only like to modify segments with
that specific time in and time out.
n
If you would like to edit segments where the employee clocks in during certain time range, enter
that range in the Time In and Time Out fields and select Time within Range.
n
If the scheduled segments must fall within a certain time range, enter that range and select Time in
and time out within range.
8. Once you have configured your range, click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
200
9. Select the data you would like to edit on the Configure Segment screen by checking the box for the rel
evant segment information and enter the modifying information. Once you have made your changes, click
Next.
10. The Summary screen will provide a summary of the operation you are about to perform, including the
number of individuals affected and the options selected for the source and destination dates. Select Pre
view to view the copy operation without making any changes to the schedule, or click Process to modify
schedules.
Transfer Job Code Information
If you have time scheduled that you want to create regular hours for, you can use the Transfer Job Code Inform
ation function to create segments in TimeClock Manager that are based directly off of scheduled segments
within Scheduler.
1. Select the Schedules drop down menu and then select Global Scheduler.
2. Select the employees you would like to transfer job code information for by either selecting specific
employees from the list, by using a Filter. Once you have selected the employees you would like include,
click Next.
3. Select Transfer Job Code Information then click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
201
4. Select the Source date range by entering in the dates of schedules you would like to modify, by select
ing them using the date picker, or use one of the preset ranges in the drop down list.
5. If you would like to only transfer certain job codes, create a Job Code Filter.
6. Check the various options for different types of segments you would like to include.
7. If you would like to limit the segment(s) being modified to those that took place at a certain time, check
Include segments matching.
Check Time in and time out match exact range if you would only like to modify segments with that
specific time in and time out.
If you would like to edit segments where the employee clocks in during certain time range, enter that
range in the Time in and Time out fields and select Time within Range.
If the scheduled segments must fall within a certain time range, enter that range and select Time in and
time out within range.
8. If the employee is required to use a cost code, check Use employee default cost code if required.
Once you have configured your range, click Next.
9. The Summary screen will provide a summary of the operation you are about to perform, including dates,
the number of individuals selected, and the types of segments you will be transferring. Select Preview to
view the copy operation without making any changes to the schedule, or click Process to transfer sched
ules into Individual Hours.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
202
WebClock
Now that you have created your employees, job codes, and managers in TimeClock Plus®, your employees are
ready to start clocking in and out. The WebClock application is the primary way employees will use TimeClock
Plus as they clock in and out, view their hours, and even request time off.
Logging into WebClock
1. Navigate to the WebClock page for your organization.
2. If your company does not show up in the Select Organization field, select it from the drop down list.
3. Enter your employee ID numberand click on Log On To Dashboard.
4. If you have a PIN, enter it in the pop-up box and click Ok.
Navigating WebClock
After you have logged into WebClock, select the relevant action from the menu bar at the top.
In the top right, you will see the server date and time as well as the button to Log Off. On the blue bar, you will
see your name as well as your status (if you are clocked in, you will see the time you clocked in, and if you are on
break, you will see the length of your break).
Performing Quick Clock Operations
1. Navigate to the WebClock page for your organization.
2. If your company does not show up in the Select Organization field, select it from the drop down list.
3. Enter in your employee ID number.
4. Select the operation you would like to perform. Be sure to follow all on-screen instructions until you receive
a Clock operation successful message.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
203
Clock In
Once you have logged into WebClock, select the Clock In button to begin your shift. This will show your manager
that you are present, the time you started working, and what job code you are working on.
Clocking In Using WebClock
1. Once you are logged into WebClock, select Clock In.
2. You will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database time, as
well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue.Click Continue.
3. If you have more than one job code, select the appropriate job code from the list.
4. If you have any unread messages, they will be displayed here. Click Continue.
5. If job costing is enabled for this job code, select the cost code you will be clocking into and click
Continue.
6. Click Ok.
Clocking In with a Missed Punch
If your company has missed punches enabled and you attempt to clock in while still clocked in to the last shift, you
will be taken to the Missed Punches screen. You will be asked to confirm that you missed an out-punch. Then,
depending on the Company Defaults, you may be asked to enter in a time for your missed punch.
For more information on setting up missed punches, see the Client Tab in TimeClock Manager > Company
> Company Defaults.
Clocking In with a Manager Override
If you are attempting to clock in while restricted, you will be taken to the manager override screen. Reasons for a
restriction may include:
n
An attempted clock in after you've met an hourly threshold or overtime.
n
An attempted clock in outside of a schedule restriction.
n
An attempted clock in before the required minimum break length.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
204
In order to clock in while restricted, have a manager with override access enter their password. Then clock in as nor
mal.
Clock Out
When you are ready to end your day, you must Clock Out to end your shift. Clocking out marks employees as no
longer working.
Clocking Out Using WebClock
1. After logging into WebClock while clocked in, select Clock Out.
2. You will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database time, as
well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue.Click Continue.
3. Click Ok on the "Clock operation successful" window.
Clocking Out with a Missed Punch
If your company has missed punches enabled and you attempt to clock out while still off the clock, you will be
taken to the Missed Punches screen. You will be asked to confirm that you missed an in-punch. Then, depending
on the Company Defaults, you may be asked to enter in a time for your missed punch.
For more information on setting up missed punches, see the Client Tab in TimeClock Manager > Company
> Company Defaults.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
205
Break
When you are ready to take a break or lunch, but are not clocking out for the day, you will use the Break button.
This will mark you as On Break within the system so your manager can see the type and length of the break being
taken.
Going on Break in WebClock
1. Once you are logged into WebClock, and while clocked in, select Break from the header bar.
2. If your company has more than one active type of break, select the appropriate break to continue.
3. If enabled, you will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database
time, as well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue.Click Continue to start your break.
Returning from a Break
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
206
1. When it is time to return from your break, log into WebClock and select Return From Break.
2. If enabled, you will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database
time, as well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue. Click Continue.
3. Select the job code that you want to clock into and click Continue.
4. Click Ok on the "Clock operation successful" window.
Change Job Code
When you switch tasks or jobs, you may have to use the Change Job Code button. Changing job codes will switch
you to the new job code and tie the two segments together. This allows the system to track each job you worked,
and when you worked them.
How to Change a Job Code
1. Once you are logged into WebClock and clocked in, select Change Job Code.
2. You will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database time, as
well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue.Click Continue.
3. You will be given a list of your available job codes. Select the job code you are changing to, and click
Continue.
4. Click Ok on the "Clock operation successful" window. You can now see the new segment tied to the old
one in the View Hours screen (if enabled).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
207
View
View Hours
The View Hours option allows you to view the hours worked in any given week. If you are required to approve
segments each week, you can do so here.
TIP: View Hours can be enabled in TimeClock Manager via the clock configuration(s) (Configuration
> Other Configurations > Clock Configurations).
Navigating the View Hours Window
1. After logging into WebClock, select View, and View Hours.
2. Select the appropriate week with the Next and Prev buttons.
3. All of the segments worked during that week can be seen in the grid below.
Approving Segments
1. After logging into WebClock, select View, and View Hours.
2. Select the appropriate week with the Next and Prev buttons.
3. Find the segment you want to approve and click on the check mark in the [E] column. If you want to
approve all the shifts on screen, click on the [E] column.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
208
Splitting Segments
TIP: In order to split segments via WebClock, Allow employee to split worked segments from
View Hours in WebClockmust be enabled for the clock configuration(s) in TimeClock Manager (Con
figuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configurations).
1. After logging into WebClock, select View, and View Hours.
2. Find the segment you'd like to split and click on the Split Segment icon.
3. In the Split Segment window, click on the Split icon in the leftmost column to create two segments.
4. By default, segments will be split by percentage. To split segments by length, click on the Percentage
column header.
5. Define how long you want your segments to be. If desired, change the break length, job code, or cost code
used for each segment.
6. If specifics need to be changed about the segment (such as break type or adding a note, click on theEdit
button to change segment details.
7. Delete segments by clicking on the Delete icon. Note that all time from deleted segments will be added
to the last segment by default.
8. Once you've split the segment, click Save to add the new segments to the hours worked.
View Last Punch
The View Last Punch option allows you to view the last time you clocked in. After selecting View Last Punch,
you will be able to see the time of your last punch as well as the job code assigned to it.
TIP: View Last Punch can be enabled in TimeClock Manager via the clock configuration(s) (Con
figuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configurations).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
209
View Schedules
View Schedules is where employees can view schedules for current and upcoming weeks.
TIP: View Schedules can be enabled in TimeClock Manager through the Clock Configuration feature
(Configuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configurations). This also allows you to specify
how many weeks are seen.
Navigating View Schedules
1. After logging into WebClock, select View then View Hours.
2. Select the week you would like to view with the Next and Prev buttons. You can also select which week
you would like to view by selecting the Calendar icon.
3. If you would like to view schedules for Saturday and Sunday, make sure that Display Weekends is
checked.
View Messages
The View Messages option allows you to view any messages sent through TimeClock Plus®. After selecting
View Messages, you will be able to see a list of messages you have been sent. Click on the note icon in the View
column to read the entire message, and check Read to remove the message from your list (if the message can be
marked as read).
TIP: View Messages can be enabled in TimeClock Manager via the clock configuration(s) (Con
figuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configurations).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
210
View Requests
The View Requests feature allows employees to enter time off requests. Time off requests are used when
employees want to request a certain amount of time off for vacation, sick, or other reasons. These requests can be
made in any leave code the employee has access to and will draw from relevant accrual banks.
TIP: Master settings for requests are enabled via the Client Tab within TimeClock Manager
> Company > Company Defaults. In addition, you may need to enable requests via the clock con
figuration(s) located in TimeClock Manager > Configuration > Other Configurations > Clock
Configurations.
Navigating View Requests
1. Access View Requests by logging into WebClock and clicking on Requests on the WebClock dashboard.
2. By default, employee requests will be visible in a Calendar view. In order to view employee requests in a
sortable list, select the List tab.
3. On the Calendar tab, the status of a request (approved, denied, or pending) can be filtered by checking
or unchecking the appropriate options beneath the tabs.
4. To have more control over what request elements are visible, switch to the List view. In addition to the
options available in Calendar view, segments can be organized by entering in a date range and clicking
Update.
Adding a Request
Employees with the correct clock configuration will be able to enter requests for assigned leave codes. To create a
request:
1. Click on the Add button on the information bar, or when in Calendar view click the plus sign on the desired
date. The date of the request must be within the allowed range defined in Company Defaults.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
211
2. Select the Start time. This will be the anchor time for the leave time sheet. Enter in the length of the leave
request in the Hours field. For example, if you wanted to create a leave request from 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM,
you would enter a start time of 9:00 AM and a length of 8:00.
3. Select how many days are being requested. By default, the request will only be entered for the initial date
requested. To create identical requests on the subsequent days, select the number from the Days field.
4. Select the Leave Code to be used for this time off request. If enabled in Company Defaults, an unspe
cified leave code can be selected. Please note that any unspecified leave codes must be replaced with a
valid leave code before the segment can be approved.
5. Enter in a description for this leave request. This step is optional and dependent on Request Entry settings
within Company Defaults.
6. Click Save.
Change Cost Code
When you switch tasks or jobs, you may have to use the Change Cost Code button. Changing cost codes will
switch you to the new cost code and tie the two segments together. This allows the system to track each task you
worked on, showing when you started and how long you worked on each.
For example, if you are working under a Carpentry job code, you may switch individual tasks throughout the day.
In this case, your cost codes, or tasks, may specify the variety of wood being used, the object being worked on,
and the specific type of labor. In this case, you might switch from ASH/CHAIR/FINISHING to OAK/TABLE/CARVING.
How to Change a Cost Code
1. Once you are logged into WebClock and while clocked in, select Change Cost Code.
2. You will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database time, as
well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue. Click Continue.
3. You will be given a list of your available cost codes. Select the cost code you are changing to, and click
Continue. This will stop the time being tracked against the previous cost code, and begin tracking against
the new cost code.
4. Click Ok on the "Clock operation successful" window. You can now see the new segment tied to the old
one in the View Hours screen (if enabled).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
212
Change Job Code
When you switch tasks or jobs, you may have to use the Change Job Code button. Changing job codes will switch
you to the new job code and tie the two segments together. This allows the system to track each job you worked,
and when you worked them.
How to Change a Job Code
1. Once you are logged into WebClock and clocked in, select Change Job Code.
2. You will now be on the Confirmation screen. You will see your name and the current database time, as
well as buttons to Cancel, go Back, or Continue.Click Continue.
3. You will be given a list of your available job codes. Select the job code you are changing to, and click
Continue.
4. Click Ok on the "Clock operation successful" window. You can now see the new segment tied to the old
one in the View Hours screen (if enabled).
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
213
Clocks
Clocks allows you to add and configure Remote Data Terminals for your organization. There are two distinct clock
apps:
n
Clock Status: This application is usually hosted on the server and allows for full, centralized access to all
clock devices that connect to the database.
n
Clock Hub: This application controls GT-400 handscanners and legacy 100/200 Series clock devices dir
ectly. It connects back to Clock Status, and can be installed on a centralized server or locally on another
computer.
TIP: Color coding has been added to help users differentiate between the two clock applications.
Clock Status uses a standard green menu bar, and Clock Hub uses a blue menu bar.
Unless otherwise noted, all documentation assumes you are logging into Clock Status.
Accessing Clock Status
1. Browse to the Clock Status site (https://[server location]/app/terminals/index.html) or select the Ter
minals icon from the bottom of another application.
2. Enter your User ID and password, and click Log On.
Clock Status
The Clock Status feature is where you can configure clock devices in order to allow employees to perform clock
operations without having to access a computer.
In addition, Clock Status acts as a centralized application to manage clocks in tandem with any Clock Hub applic
ations, which can directly control legacy 100/200 Series clock devices at their respective locations.
Adding a Clock Through Location
1. Click on the Add button in the upper right corner of the Clock Hub feature.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
214
2. On the Add Clock screen, choose Select from list and click Next.
3. If you would like to base this clock's settings on a clock that has already been set up, select the clock you
would like to use from the Template dropdown.
4. Enter in a Description for the clock. The description is a brief name (e.g., 2nd Floor Terminal) that allows
users to easily discern what clock they are working with.
5. Select a Location for this clock. The location is just a description of where the clock device is physically loc
ated for sorting and filtering purposes.
6. Select the clock you would like to use from the Select Clock list. This list includes all clock devices (both
serial and Ethernet) that have been located by Clock Hub.
7. Click Finish to save the clock's configuration.
Adding a Legacy Ethernet Clock
1. Click on the Add button in the upper right corner of the Clock Hub feature.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
215
2. On the Add Terminal Configuration screen, select Add network clock and click Next.
3. If you would like to base this clock device's settings on a clock device that has already been set up, select
the clock device you would like to use from the Template dropdown.
4. Enter in a Description for the clock device. The description is a brief name (e.g., 2nd Floor Terminal) that
allows users to easily discern what clock device they are working with.
5. Select a Location for this clock device. The location is just a description of where the clock device is phys
ically located for sorting and filtering purposes.
6. Enter the IP address for your clock device This can be found on the clock device itself.
7. Enter the Port number for this clock device. By default, this is 3001. The port number can be found on the
clock device itself.
8. Click Finish to save this clock's configuration.
Adding a Legacy Serial Clock
1. Click on theAdd button in the upper right corner of the Clock Hub feature.
2. On the Add Clock Configuration screen, select Add serial clock and click Next.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
216
3. If you would like to base this clock's settings on a clock device that has already been set up, select the clock
device you would like to use from the Template dropdown.
4. Enter in a Description for the clock. The description is a brief name (e.g., 2nd Floor Terminal) that allows
users to easily discern what clock they are working with.
5. Select the COM port the clock uses on this PC. The COM port used will be determined during clock setup.
6. Select the Baud rate used by this clock from the dropdown menu. By default, this is set to 115200.
However, if your clock uses a different baud rate, the setting here must match it to ensure the clock is able
to communicate with the database.
7. Click Finish to save this clock's configuration.
Managing Clocks
Once a clock device has been added, it may or may not start, depending on clock settings. To start, stop, or restart
a clock, select it from the list of clocks to the left and click on the Manage button.
This will open a menu where the clock can be started, stopped, or restarted. In addition, clock operational logs can
be accessed for troubleshooting purposes, and settings from one clock can be copied to another by using the
Copy button.
General Tab
The General Tab of Clock Status allows you to change settings pertaining to the clock's identification, con
figuration, and which employees can access it.
General Clock Settings
Description: The name of this clock (for example, maintenance clock). The clock description is used for finding
the clock in a list as well as for sorting purposes.
Location: The physical location of the clock (for example, second floor). The clock location can be used for sorting
and filtering the clock list.
IP address (Ethernet clocks only): This is the IP address of the clock device. The IP address can be found within
the clock's settings.
Port number (legacy Ethernet clocks only): This is the port number used by the clock to communicate with
TimeClock Plus®. The port number defaults to 3001, but can be set within the clock itself. Please note that this
used with legacy 100/200 Series clocks.
COM port (legacy serial clocks only): This is the COM port on the Clock Hub computer that the serial clock is
connected to. Only legacy 100/200 Series clocks have a serial option.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
217
Baud rate (legacy serial clocks only): This is the baud rate (or data speed) the serial clock uses to communicate
with TimeClock Plus. The default baud rate is 115200, but other baud rates can be configured on the clock.
Startup delay (legacy clocks only): This option determines how long the clock takes to automatically connect
after booting up.
Validate connection (legacy clocks only): This button allows you to verify that a stable connection is main
tained with the clock, by performing a quick connection test.
Clock configuration: Select a clock configuration from the dropdown list here, or create a new one. For more
information, see TimeClock Manager > Configuration > Other Configurations > Clock Configuration.
Only selected employees may use this clock: This option allows you to create a filter for which employees are
allowed access to this clock. Only employees included in this filter will be able to perform clock operations on this
clock.
Clock Settings Tab
The Clock Settings tab of Clock Status allows users to change different settings regarding clock operations.
Settings
Enable Time Zone: If your clock device is in located another time zone than your database server, then you can
specify the time zone here.
GT-400 and Legacy 100/200 Series settings
If you have a GT-400 handscanner or legacy 100/200 Series clock device connected via a Clock Hub, then the fol
lowing options will be available specifically for that type of device:
n
Automatically start this clock when Clock Hub starts: This option automatically starts this clock in the
event the local Clock Hub restarts.
n
Display current company time at title screen: This option displays the current company time on the
clock. If you would like the clock to only display hours and minutes, select Display minutes only (no
seconds).
n
Beep when a key is pressed: This option causes the clock to produce a beeping sound when a button is
pressed.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
218
n
Beep when a badge is successfully read: This option causes the clock to produce a beeping sound
when a badge is swiped and read. This provides audio feedback to the employee to confirm the badge
was read successfully.
n
Allow badge test by pressing "00" on the idle screen: When this option is enabled, you can test
badges by pressing the 0 key twice on the idle screen, and choosing your desired badge type.
n
Allow clock identification by pressing "11" at the idle screen: With this option enabled, a clock iden
tification screen (with information such as IP address) can be viewed by pressing the 1 key twice on the
idle screen.
n
Allow updating Clock Hub configurations manually by pressing "22" at the idle screen: With this
option enabled, if you press the 2 key twice on the idle screen, then you can update your Clock Hub con
figuration from the clock device itself.
Idle Timeout
The Idle timeout settings determine how many seconds the clock device will wait for user input before auto
matically canceling an operation. For example, if the idle timeout is set to 5, once an employee presses Clock In,
they have five seconds to enter their ID or swipe their badge before the operation cancels.
Feedback
Feedback determines what kind of audio-visual feedback the clock gives for successful and failed clock oper
ations. Both successful and failed operations can have different settings.
n
Number of beeps: This determines the number of beeps (1-9) that will sound when the operation suc
ceeds of fails.
n
Beep tone: This determines the tone the beeps will be in. 1 is high pitched, and 5 is the lowest. If the
clock device does not support multi-tonal sounds, this option will have no audible effect.
n
LED duration (legacy clock devices only): This option determines how long LED lights will display after
the operation (from 0.5 to 5 seconds).
Monitoring
NOTE: Monitoring settings are only available for GT-400 handscanner and legacy 100/200 Series clock
devices, and not for RDTg devices.
n
Enable automatic screen refresh on this clock: This option enables a refresh of the screen every so
often. This is usually used with serial clocks to keep data current.
n
Enable connection monitoring on the clock: This option enables connection monitoring. Connection
monitoring is primarily used for serial clocks, and sends a small query to the clock at the designated time to
ensure that it is still connected.
Punch Settings Tab
The Punch Settings tab allows you to choose how the clock handles individual punches.
Operation Settings
n
Display message on successful clock operations: This option displays a confirmation message when
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
219
the employee has successfully clocked in on the clock.
n
Force badge usage to perform a clock operation: If your clock has a badge reader, then this will force
employees to use their badges when performing a clock operation, and will not allow them to enter their
ID number on the keypad.
QuickPunch settings
n
Enable QuickPunch: This will enable the QuickPunch option on the clock, which allows the employee to
clock in or out by simply swiping a badge without choosing a clock operation on the keypad. This setting
will reference the employee's last punch, and create a new punch based on the previous one.
n
Ignore a repeated QuickPunch within how many seconds of the first QuickPunch: In case the
employee accidentally swipes their badge twice within a certain time frame, this option prevents the
second QuickPunch from registering as a valid punch in the database.
Fallback Mode
n
Enable fallback timeout: If you have a clock capable of Fallback Mode, then this can be activated to
allow a disconnected clock device to enter Fallback Mode within a certain time frame. The time frame itself
(in seconds) can be entered into the Fallback timeout seconds box.
n
Validation file updates: In case the clock needs to be up-to-date in the event of a disconnect, you can
set up times for the server to automatically update the clock's internal memory as it pertains to employee
information, job code information, and so on. Checking Automatically update offline validation files
at the following times, then setting up to four update times, will update the clock's memory.
Hardware Extension Configurations
The Hardware Extension Configurations feature allows users to configure Remote Data Terminals that contain
biometric readers, such as fingerprint readers or handscanners, as well as configure digital output and/or badge
processing. Configurations created here can be added to a clock on its General tab.
Configuring a Cogent Fingerprint RDTg
1. In Clock Status, navigate to Hardware Extension Configurations by selecting Configurations from
the Hardware Extensions menu.
2. Click on the green Add button in the upper right corner.
3. In the Add Hardware Extension Configuration window, enter the Name you would like to use for this
configuration. In the Module type dropdown, select Cogent Fingerprint 300/400 Series. Click Next.
4. Select how much often partial match fingerprints are accepted on the clock in the Allowed print vari
ance dropdown. You can also select how many beeps will sound on successful and failed verifications,
as well as whether or not this device will Use only biometrics for management overrides.
5. Click Next. Under Options, configure the following settings:
n
Display print accepted message after successful verification: If enabled, clock operations
completed with a successful verification will display an acceptance message on the clock.
n
Synchronize prints from database to reader before verification: If enabled, before veri
fication the clock will check the database for a newer print than what is currently stored internally in
the reader and update the internal reader with the newest set.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
220
n
Allow any operation if no print is enrolled for individual: If enabled, an employee without a
fingerprint on file will be able to complete a clock operation.
n
Timeout for a verification: This is the amount of idle time before a fingerprint verification will
cease the operation.
6. Click Next.
7. On the Identification page, select what clock operations you would like to have employees use only their
fingerprints for. Identification is NOT recommended for organizations with 50 or more employees, or set
tings where employee clock operations must be entered rapidly.
8. Once you are done, click Finish.
Configuring a Cogent Fingerprint for a Legacy Clock
1. In Clock Status, navigate to Hardware Extension Configurations by selecting Configurations from
the Hardware Extensions menu.
2. Click on the green Add button in the upper right corner.
3. In the Add Hardware Extension Configuration window, enter the Name you would like to use for this
configuration. In the Module type dropdown, select Cogent Fingerprint 100/200 Series. Click Next.
4. On the Settings page, choose the Configuration access key managers will use to access enrollment.
Additionally, select how managers will use to view the enrollment option with Configuration access
method. If accessing enrollment requires a password, that password can be entered by selecting Change
Password.
NOTE: This password is not the same password used for other manager overrides, and is used by all
managers that will be accessing this clock to enroll employees.
5. Select how much often partial match fingerprints are accepted on the clock in the Allowed print vari
ation dropdown. If the clock device supports audio feedback, select how many beeps will sound on suc
cessful and failed verifications.
6. If you would like to allow the fingerprint sensor to recalibrate when the port is started through Clock Status,
check Calibrate fingerprint sensor when port is started (~20 seconds). This will cause the port to
take longer to start up, but it will allow for more accurate reads. Click Next to continue.
7. Under Manager Enrollment, check Use system to enroll management prints for overrides and
access control to allow managers to enroll fingerprints on this configuration. Here you can also choose to
allow managers to use their RDT override password, require a fingerprint, or only use a password if the fin
gerprint fails.
8. Under Enrollment Process, select whether or not you'd like users to press a button when scanning a fin
gerprint for enrollment, or have the enrollment process immediately proceed after a period of time. If
Automatically start the second enrollment after a period of time was selected, select how long
you'd like the delay between captures to be.
9. If you'd like to hide previously enrolled fingers when an employee is enrolling (to prevent accidentally over
riding existing prints), check Hide previously enrolled indexes when enrolling a new print.
10. If the clock is Fallback Mode capable, select whether or not you'd like the employees' clock operations to
be Approved or Rejected if they have no prints on file. Click Next.
11. Select which clock operations you would like to Verify with fingerprints. Verifying a clock operation means
that employees will scan their fingerprint after they have entered their employee ID or badge number.
12. Under Options, configure the following settings:
n
Display print accepted message after successful verification: If enabled, clock operations
completed with a successful verification will display an acceptance message on the clock.
n
Synchronize prints from database to reader before verification: If enabled, before veri
fication the clock will check the database for a newer print than what is currently stored internally in
the reader and update the internal reader with the newest set.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
221
n
Allow any operation if no print is enrolled for individual: If enabled, an employee without a
fingerprint on file will be able to complete a clock operation.
n
During verification what action should be taken when an individual has multiple prints
on file:
n
n
Verify against the lowest enrolled print index automatically: Verifies against print
number 1 if number 1 is the first print you enrolled.
n
Request the print index to verify from the individual will allow the employee to
select which enrolled print to verify against.
n
Verify against all enrolled prints attempts to verify your fingerprint against all prints on
file.
Timeout for a verification: This is the maximum allowed time before the verification times out
and fails.
13. Click Next. On the Identification page, select what clock operations you would like to have employees
use only their fingerprints for (no ID or badge entry required beforehand).
BEST PRACTICES: Because the Identification method checks a scan against all enrolled fingerprints in
the database, it is NOT recommended for organizations with 50 or more employees, or alongside set
tings where employee clock operations must be entered rapidly.
14. Select Allow manual entry of ID number if identification fails to allow the employee to enter in
their employee ID if they are unable to make a successful Identification match. Additionally, choose the
Maximum number of seconds to attempt identification to allow a set amount of time before the
Identification process times out.
15. Click Finish.
Configuring a GT-400 Handscanner
1. Navigate to Hardware Extension Configurations by selecting Configuration from the Hardware
Extensions menu.
2. Click on the Add button in the upper right corner.
3. In the Add Hardware Extension Configuration window, enter the Name you would like to use for this
configuration. In the Module type dropdown, select Handscanner. Click Next.
4. In the Enrollment Settings section, choose the Configuration access key managers will use to access
enrollment. Select how long the enrollment will take to timeout by entering a value in Enrollment
timeout. If you would like managers to use this handscanner to enroll themselves, check Use hand
scanner to enroll managers. Additionally, check Display enroll soft key on main menu to create an
enrollment key on the handscanner screen if the space exists.
5. In Enrollment Access, choose whether to allow managers to use a management scan only, the enroll
ment password only, or ccessing enrollment using password if management scan fails. If access
ing enrollment requires a password, that password can be entered by selecting Change Password.
NOTE: This password is not the same password used for other manager overrides, and is used by ALL
managers that will be accessing this clock device to enroll employees.
6. On the Verification screen, choose the clock operations that will require a handscan when performed by
an employee.
7. Under Options, determine the Approval threshold, or the amount of variance allowed in scanning hand
prints (this is set to 75 by default). Select how long you would like the handscanner to idle when waiting
for a scan by entering a value in Verification timeout. Finally, you can choose to Allow any operation
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
222
when scan is not on file, and select Display scan accepted message when scan is successful if you
would like scan confirmation.
8. Click Next. Under Management Overrides, select how you would like the clock device to handle over
rides when required.
n
Use the default method to perform overrides: If selected, the manager’s override password
(defined in the Passwords Tab in the User List) will be required to perform an override.
n
Use only a manager’s hand scan to perform overrides: If selected, the manager’s scan will be
required to perform an override.
n
Use manager scan if successful but use default method if unsuccessful: If selected, the
manager’s hand scan will be required to perform an override, but if it fails, then the manager’s over
ride password may be entered.
9. Click Finish.
Configuring Digital Output
1. Navigate to Hardware Extension Configurations by selecting Configuration from the Hardware
Extensions menu.
2. Click on the Add button in the upper right corner.
3. In the Add Hardware Extension Configuration window, enter the Name you would like to use for this
configuration. In the Module type dropdown, select Digital Output. Click Next.
4. Under Digital Output Triggers, select the clock operations you'd like to have trigger the digital output,
as well as for how long. Additionally, check Perform these triggers in fallback mode if you'd like to
have these triggers occur on a fallback-capable clock device when it cannot reach Clock Status.
5. Click Next.
n
If QuickPunch is enabled in on a clock (via the Punch Settings Tab in Clock Status), you can select
whether QuickPunch is access only, meaning that QuickPunch triggers the DO without triggering
a clock operation.
n
You can also select a key that would allow QuickPunch, as well as how many seconds a QuickPunch
would trigger your Digital Output components.
n
If using a clock device with a physical keypad, you can choose whether or not to disable the keypad
by checking Disable all keys when idle at main screen.
6. Click Next. In the Timers section, choose specific days and times to trigger the Digital Output module.
Click Add to select the dates and times the trigger will occur, as well as for how long.
EXAMPLE: An organization would like a buzzer to sound for 15 seconds at the beginning of every week
day morning shift. To set this up, each weekday would be selected, and the trigger time would be 7
AM with a duration of 15 seconds.
7. Click Finish.
Configuring a Digital Persona Fingerprint RDTg
1. In Clock Status, navigate to Hardware Extension Configurations by selecting Configurations from
the Hardware Extensions menu.
2. Click on the green Add button in the upper right corner.
3. In the Add Hardware Extension Configuration window, enter the Name you would like to use for this
configuration. In the Module type dropdown, select Digital Persona. Click Next.
4. If you would like the employees to receive a confirmation message, check Display print accepted mes
sage after successful verification. If you would like non-enrolled employees to perform clock oper
ations without a scan, select Allow any operation if no print is enrolled for individual.
Configuring Badge Processing
If you have a clock that reads badges, you can configure the reader's parse and translation settings just like you
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
223
would configure any other add-on configuration. This is expanded on in Badge Processing.
Assigning a Configuration to a Clock
Once a configuration has been created, it can be assigned to any clock devices under the Hardware Extensions
tab in Clock Status. Select the type of module you'd like to configure, and choose the configuration you just cre
ated in the Select add-on configuration dropdown.
If you have a cogent fingerprint clock, then the Cogent Fingerprint section will also contain buttons to Manage
Fingerprint Data (for syncing or deleting print data from a clock) and Firmware Update (for updating the
cogent firmware on the clock). Neither of these options will be available until the clock is connected to Clock
Status.
Hardware Extension Data
The Manage Module Data feature allows users to view and delete manager and employee data used in clock
modules (such as fingerprint or handscan data).
Deleting Hardware Extension Data
NOTE: The deletion of module data is permanent and can NOT be undone. If biometric data is deleted,
then the employee will need to be re-enrolled.
1. Access the Hardware Extension Data feature by selecting Data from the Hardware Extensions menu
of Clock Status.
2. Select the relevant tab for the information you would like to delete. For example, to delete an employee's
handscan, you would select the Employee Handscanner Data tab.
3. Search for the employee or manager you would like to delete data for by either using the Search bar, cre
ating an Employee Filter, or finding that employee on the list.
4. Select the record(s) you would like to delete, and click the Delete button.
Badge Processing
If you have a clock that uses a magnetic or proximity badge reader, then you will likely need to set up Badge Pro
cessing in order for the clock to read the badge. This can be done for any badges used for employees, job codes,
cost codes, manager, password, and/or tracked entries.
Configuring Badge Processing for RDTg 300/400 Series Clocks
1. Navigate to Clock Status, choose Hardware Extensions, and select Configurations.
2. Click Add. Give the configuration a name, and choose the extension specific to 300/400 Series badge pro
cessing.
3. Click Next. You will then select the Add button.
4. A Badge Rule window will open. In the Rule information section, specify each of the following:
n
Information type
n
Reader type
n
Reader location
n
Badge length
5. If using a Proximity reader type, you can set your Proximity Translation. You can choose:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
224
n
No translation -- parse only: This leaves the information untranslated and as-is.
n
Translate raw badge to decimal then parse result: This converts the entire badge to decimal,
then uses the parse settings.
n
Parse raw badge then translate result to decimal: This uses the parse settings first, then trans
lates the results.
6. Below that, you can set your Parse Settings. This determines how the system will read the information
contained on the badge. You can choose to:
n
Use all characters in the badge
n
Use portion of the badge: This starts at a certain character, and continues on for a number of char
acters.
n
Use last characters in badge: This will use only the last characters in the badge to a certain point.
7. If need be, you can use the Test Settings button to see how the badge information will be processed.
8. Click Update. Repeat the process for any other badge types that may be used, and click Save to complete
the configuration.
Configuring Badge Processing for Legacy 100/200 Series Clocks
1. Navigate to Clock Status, choose Hardware Extensions, and select Configurations.
2. Click Add. Give the configuration a name, and choose the hardware extension specific to 100/200 Series
badge processing.
3. Click Next. You will then select the
n
Cost Code
n
Employee
n
Job Code
n
Manager
n
Password
n
Tracked Entry
icon next to the item(s) that will use badges:
4. Another window will open. Here, you can set your Proximity Translation. You can choose:
n
No translation -- parse only: This leaves the information untranslated and as-is.
n
Translate raw badge to decimal then parse result: This converts the entire badge to decimal,
then uses the parse settings.
n
Parse raw badge then translate result to decimal: This uses the parse settings first, then trans
lates the results.
5. Below that, you can set your Parse Settings. This determines how the system will read the information
contained on the badge. You can choose to Use all characters in the badge, Use portion of the
badge (which starts at a certain character, and continues on for a number of characters), or Use last char
acters in badge.
6. If need be, you can use the Test Settings button to see how the badge information will be processed.
7. Click Update. Repeat the process for any other badge types that may be used, and click Save to complete
the configuration.
Hardware
RDTg Clock Setup
If you have an RDTg 300/400 Series clock device, the device is typically configured with the TimeClock Plus®
server's network information, and is managed via the central Clock Status.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
225
Connect and Mount the RDTg
1. Locate and position: Select a location that is 48” to 52” from the floor to the bottom of the clock device,
and within 6 feet of an outlet (unless PoE will be utilized). Open the clock using the barrel key provided.
Using the back of the clock device as a template, mark the mounting screw holes. Be sure to level the clock
device prior to marking/drilling holes.
2. Prepare the clock device: Remove the plastic plug from the top or bottom of the clock device (as neces
sary) so that the Ethernet and power cables can be routed inside and connected. You can also use the
opening on the back of the unit if the power and Ethernet wires come directly from the wall where the
clock will be mounted.
3. Hang and secure clock device: Secure the back of the clock to the wall using mounting screws with hard
ware appropriate for the wall type (anchors and screws are ideal for drywall and concrete walls).
4. Route the power and Ethernet cable through the opening of the clock device created in Step 2.
l
Communication and power: Connect the Ethernet cable to the network and to the Ethernet
Port of the clock device.
l
Connect the power supply to the Power Input port. If you are using PoE or Injected Power Over
Ethernet, please refer that device's documentation for additional instructions.
5. Close and lock clock device: Once all connections are secure, close and lock the clock device.
6. Place the keys in a secure place for future use.
Connecting the RDTg
1. Log into Clock Status in TimeClock Plus v7, and click the Add button. Choose the wizard for a 300/400
Series clock, and choose the option to Setup connection from the clock. This will provide you with a list
of settings to be set for the clock device.
2. Provide power to the clock device and enter the Company Selection screen after it boots.
3. On the Company Selection screen, press the Device button to enter the Device Settings.
4. By default the Device menu is not password protected. A password can be added on the Password tab.
5. On the Server tab, enter in the Server name or its IP address next to the Server URL.
6. Enter in a Port number.
7. Fill in the Namespace field if the company exists within a specific namespace. If not, then leave this field
blank.
8. Enter a name for the clock device next to Device Name. This is how this clock will be identified in Clock
Status.
9. Press Ok to save the changes.
TIP: By switching to the Network tab, you can choose to enable DHCP or set up a manual configuration.
Connecting a Wi-Fi RDTg
1. Log into Clock Status in TimeClock Plus v7, and click the Add button. Choose the wizard for a 300/400
Series clock, and choose the option to Setup connection from the clock. This will provide you with a list
of settings to be set for the clock.
2. Provide power to the clock device and enter the Company Selection screen after it boots.
3. On the Company Selection screen, press the Device button to enter the Device Settings.
4. On the Server tab, enter in the URL of the server next to Server URL. This can be either the name of your
server or its IP address.
5. Enter in a Port number.
6. Fill in the Namespace field if the company exists within a specific namespace. If not, then leave this field
blank.
7. Enter a name for the clock device next to Device Name. This is how this clock will be identified in Clock
Status.
8. On the Wi-Fi tab, select your SSID, Security type, and enter the Passcode if necessary.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
226
9. Press Ok to save the changes and accept the prompt to restart the clock device.
Uploading RDTg connection settings via USB
You can also directly load connection settings to an RDTg via a special file that is uploaded to the device via USB.
This is required if you have a non-touch version of the RDTg clock that does not utilize a touchscreen, or if you
need to quickly configure settings for multiple devices.
1. Log into Clock Status in TimeClock Plus v7, and click Add. Choose the wizard for a 300/400 Series clock,
and choose the option to Upload clock connection settings via USB. Click Next.
2. Input your desired configuration settings. Certain settings like Namespace and Wi-Fi are optional, and are
only used if you utilize these features. Click Next.
3. Download the configuration file. Save this file to the root of a USB drive.
4. Plug the USB drive into the USB port on the left side of the RDTg (beneath the rubber tab).
5. Go into the clock's Device menu, choose the Load from USB button at the bottom, and press Ok in the
Load Settings window. This will upload and save the connection settings to the clock.
Registering and configuring an RDTg
Once your RDTg is connected to the database, you will need to register it with the company or companies that will
be allowed access to this clock.
1. On the clock's company selection screen, use the arrows to highlight and select a company that will have
access to this clock.
2. Press the on-screen Configure button. This will take you to a user selection screen, where you will log in
with a user and Clock Access password.
3. Press the Ok button, and you will receive a confirmation message telling you that the clock has been
registered. Once this is done, you can also use this screen to set the company as the clock's default, con
figure any available biometrics, and adjust other settings.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 for any other companies that will use this clock.
5. Once the clock has been registered, you can browse to Clock Status (typically located at http://[server]
/app/terminals/ or via the link at the bottom of any TimeClock Plus application), and log into the desired
company. The clock should show up in the list automatically, and you can configure the individual settings
as needed.
Using an RDTg
Clocking In
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Clock In.
3. Confirm the name is correct and select Continue.
4. If enabled, you will be prompted to select a job code and select Continue.
5. If enabled, you may also need to enter in a tracked amount before continuing.
Clocking Out
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Clock Out.
3. If enabled, you will be prompted to confirm your name is correct. Select Continue.
4. If enabled, you may also need to enter in a tracked amount or answer a question before continuing.
Clocking Out for Break (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Start Break.
3. Confirm the name is correct and select Continue.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
227
Clocking In from Break (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select End Break or Clock In.
3. Confirm the name is correct and select Continue.
Changing Job Codes (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Change Job Code.
3. Confirm the name is correct and select Continue.
4. Choose the new job code and select Continue.
Viewing Hours (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Confirm the name is correct and select Continue.
3. Select Self Service and choose View Hours.
Viewing Schedules (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Self Service and choose View Schedules.
Viewing Accruals (if enabled)
1. Enter the employee number and select Continue.
2. Select Self Service and choose Accruals.
GT-400 Handscanner Device Setup
GT-400 handscanner clock devices utilize an Ethernet connection. These clock devices are configured with an IP
address, as well as other various network settings.
Product Components
l
Clock device
l
Wall mount
l
Power Pack
l
Ethernet Cable
l
Barrel Keys
Wall-mount Installation
1. Locate a suitable spot for the wall-mount on a smooth surface at a minimum height of 46” off the floor.
2. Align a bubble level with the top edge of the wall mount and gently rotate the mount until the bubble
level shows that the top edge of the mount is level.
3. Using the mount as a template, mark the locations of the mount holes.
4. Remove mount and drills holes with appropriate hardware based on wall material.
5. Re-position wall-mount and fasten securely to wall.
Clock Installation
1. Connect the power pack to the clock device’s Power In port.
2. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the GT-400’s Ethernet port.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on your network device.
4. Place clock device over the wall-mount, making sure to route the power and Ethernet cable through the
access hole at bottom or back of the mounting plate.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
228
5. Hook clock device onto top hanger tabs. This will align the clock device on the wall-mount. Rotate bottom
in while sliding upward until clock device drops into hanger tabs.
6. Slide the clock device down and close it. Be careful to not crush any electronic components within the
clock device by forcing it closed. You may have to check for cable clearances within the clock device.
7. Secure clock device to wall mount with the barrel lock at the bottom.
Configuring a GT-400
1. To configure the clock device, power it on and press the Fn and 1 keys (in that order) when the display
reads F1 for setup... If the clock device displays Waiting for Host, then it has already completed the
boot process. Reset the power to the clock device and press Fn and 1 when prompted.
2. This will enter the Terminal Setup menu. Press the down arrow to select Ethernet and then press
Yes/Enter to confirm the selection.
3. The clock device will then display the Ethernet Settings menu. Press Yes/Enter to select IP Address.
4. The clock device will display its current network configuration. Enter an IP address for the clock device
and press Yes/Enter. This IP address must be accessible by the computer that will be running the Clock
Hub application. Please contact your network administrator if you are unfamiliar with configuring a network
device.
5. Enter the subnet mask into the field labeled SM, and press Yes/Enter.
6. Enter the default gateway into the field labeled GW, and press Yes/Enter.
7. When the display reads Accept Changes, press Yes/Enter for confirmation.
8. Press No/Esc to return to the Terminal Setup menu.
9. Press the down arrow key until the Save and Exit option is selected.
10. Press Yes/Enter to exit the Terminal Setup menu. This will reset the clock device and allow it to accept
communication from the Clock Hub.
Legacy Terminals (100/200 Series)
Legacy 100/200 Series terminals are compatible with TimeClock Plus® v7.
Using a Legacy 100/200 Series Clock Device
The 100/200 Series Remote Data Terminal (RDT) is a legacy device that allows employees to clock in and out
without a computer. It collects punches and communicates those back to the TimeClock Plus® database via the
Clock Hub application.
Legacy 100/200 Series RDT devices use a physical keypad for data entry.
TIP: When entering the employee number, step 3 in the following lists of steps will only be necessary if
the option Show confirmation screen on manual entry is enabled in Clock Hub. When swiping a
card, step 3 will only be necessary if the option Show confirmation screen on non-manual entry is
enabled in Clock Hub.
Clocking In
1. Press Clock In.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card. If swiping a card, swipe with the
magnetic strip or bar code facing right.
3. Press Yes/Enter if prompted to confirm your identity.
l
l
If more than one clockable job code has been assigned to the employee, then the job code will need to
be selected.
If a tracked field is required, then an amount will need to be entered.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
229
l
l
If a restriction exists then a manager may override it with his/her Clock Override password.
If the clock device has a magnetic/bar code reader, then a card can be encoded with the override pass
word and the manager can swipe the card when asked for the password (which is more secure than enter
ing the password in front of the employee).
Clocking Out
1. Press Clock Out.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press Yes/Enter if prompted to confirm your identity.
l
If a clock restriction exists, then a manager will need to override it with his/her Clock Override password.
l
If a tracked field is required, then an amount will need to be entered.
Clocking Out for a Break
1. Press Start Break.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press Yes/Enter if prompted to confirm your identity.
TIP: There is one break type by default. However, more than one break type may be created in TimeC
lock Manager (COMPANY > Company Defaults > Global > Breaks). After pressing Start Break, if
prompted, choose the correct break type.
If a tracked field is required, then that amount will need to be entered.
Changing Job Codes
1. Press Job Code.
2. Enter your employee number, and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press Yes/Enter if prompted to confirm your identity.
4. Select the new job code and press Yes/Enter.
If a tracked field is required, then an amount will need to be entered.
Changing Cost Codes (Requires Job Costing Module)
If Job Costing is loaded and enabled for the employee, and that employee is clocked into a job code that requires
a cost code, then the employee may change cost codes.
1. Press Cost Code.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press Yes/Enter if prompted to confirm your identity.
4. Select the new cost code using the Clock In and Clock Out keys to move through the list, and press
Yes/Enter to select each level.
Viewing Hours
Employees may view their hours in the current week on the clock device if View Options have been enabled.
1. Press View, then the number 1, to view hours worked.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press 0 for detail on the shift or press No/Esc to return to the main screen.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
230
TIP: Managers may edit hours on the clock device if the option to allow editing of hours from the
employee access clock device is enabled in TimeClock Manager. The manager must have a user account
with rights to edit hours from the clock device, as defined in User Profiles.
Viewing the Last Punch
Employees may view their last punch on the clock device if the option to allow viewing of last punch is enabled in
TimeClock Manager. If you enabled/disabled this option, then the port or ports in Clock Hub may need to be
stopped and started again.
1. Press View. In the View menu, choose the Last Punch option.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Once you've viewed the punch, press any key on the keypad to return to the View menu.
Viewing Schedules
Employees may view their schedules for the current week and the next week on the clock device if the option to
allow viewing of schedules is enabled in TimeClock Manager.
1. Press View, then the number 2, to view hours scheduled.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. If prompted, select this week or next week, and press Yes/Enter.
4. Press Clock In or Clock Out to move through the schedules. Press No/Esc to return to the main screen.
Viewing Accruals
Employees may view their accruals up to the beginning of the current week on the clock device if the option to
allow viewing of accruals (up to current week) is enabled in TimeClock Manager.
1. Press View, then the number 3, to view accrued hours.
2. Enter your employee number and press Yes/Enter, or swipe your card.
3. Press a key after the warning. The warning, although the date will vary, should read: “Information accurate
to 10/21/2015. Press a key.”
4. Press Yes/Enter to move between accrual banks, and then press No/Esc to return to the main screen.
Ethernet 100/200 Series Clock Device Setup
Some legacy 100/200 Series clock devices utilize an Ethernet connection. These clock devices are configured
with an IP address, as well as other various network settings.
Product Components
l
Clock device
l
Wall mount
l
Power Pack
l
Ethernet Cable
l
Barrel Keys
Wall-mount Installation
1. Locate a suitable spot for the wall-mount on a smooth surface at a minimum height of 46” off the floor.
2. Align a bubble level with the top edge of the wall mount and gently rotate the mount until the bubble
level shows that the top edge of the mount is level.
3. Using the mount as a template, mark the locations of the mount holes.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
231
4. Remove mount and drills holes with appropriate hardware based on wall material.
5. Re-position wall-mount and fasten securely to wall.
Clock Installation
1. Connect the power pack to the clock device’s Power In port.
2. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the clock device’s Ethernet port.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on your network device.
4. Place clock device over the wall-mount, making sure to route the power and Ethernet cable through the
access hole at bottom or back of the mounting plate.
5. Hook clock device onto top hanger tabs. This will align the clock device on the wall-mount. Rotate bottom
in while sliding upward until clock device drops into hanger tabs.
6. Slide the clock device down and close it. Be careful to not crush any electronic components within the
clock device by forcing it closed. You may have to check for cable clearances within the clock device.
7. Secure clock device to wall mount with the barrel lock at the bottom.
Configuring a Series 100/200 Ethernet Clock Device
1. To configure the clock device, power it on and press F1 when the display reads F1 for setup... If the clock
device is displaying Waiting for Host, then it has already completed the boot process. Reset the power
to the clock device and press F1 when prompted.
2. This will enter the Terminal Setup menu. Press the down arrow (F2) to select Ethernet and then press
Yes/Enter to confirm the selection.
3. The clock device will then display the Ethernet Settings menu. Press Yes/Enter to select IP Address.
4. The clock device will display its current network configuration. Enter an IP address for the clock device
and press Yes/Enter. This IP address must be accessible by the computer that will be running the Clock
Hub application. Please contact your network administrator if you are unfamiliar with configuring a network
device.
5. Enter the subnet mask into the field labeled SM, and press Yes/Enter.
6. Enter the default gateway into the field labeled GW, and press Yes/Enter.
7. When the display reads Accept Changes, press Yes/Enter for confirmation.
8. Press No/Esc to return to the Terminal Setup menu.
9. Press the down arrow (F2) key until the Save and Exit option is selected.
10. Press Yes/Enter to exit the Terminal Setup menu. This will reset the clock device and allow it to accept
communication from the Clock Hub.
Serial 100/200 Series Setup
Some legacy 100/200 Series clock devices utilize a serial connection. These clock devices are connected to a com
puter's serial port or serial-to-USB connection, and are configured with a baud rate (which is a data speed).
Product Components
n
Clock device
n
Wall mount
n
Power Pack
n
Serial Cable
n
Adapter
n
Barrel Keys
Wall-mount Installation
1. Locate a suitable spot for the wall-mount on a smooth surface at a minimum height of 46” off the floor.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
232
2. Align a bubble level with the top edge of the wall mount and gently rotate the mount until the bubble
level shows that the top edge of the mount is level.
3. Using the mount as a template, mark the locations of the mount holes.
4. Remove mount and drills holes with appropriate hardware based on wall material.
5. Re-position wall-mount and fasten securely to wall.
Clock Installation
1. Connect power pack to the clock device’s Power In port.
2. Connect one end of the serial cable to the clock device’s Serial Port to PC on the daughter board located
in the wall-mount.
3. Connect the other end of the serial cable to the adapter.
4. Connect the adapter to a serial port on the back of the computer that will control it.
5. Place clock device over the wall-mount, making sure to route the power and serial cable through the access
hole at bottom or back of the mounting plate.
6. Hook clock device onto top hanger tabs. This will align the clock device on the wall-mount. Rotate bottom
in while sliding upward until clock device drops into hanger tabs.
7. Slide the clock device down and close it. Be careful to not crush any electronic components within the
clock device by forcing it closed. You may have to check for cable clearances within the clock device.
8. Secure clock device to wall mount with the barrel lock at the bottom.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
233
How To...
Sometimes, the setup of certain configurations within TimeClock Plus® will require multiple steps to be per
formed before a feature is fully available. This section will go over some of the more commonly used multi-step
configurations, and will set you on your way to using TimeClock Plus in the best manner possible.
Set Up Accruals
To set up Accruals, you will need to create an Accrual Rule that automatically generates leave time, an Accrual
Bank that stores that time, and then assign that bank to your employees through the Employee Profiles.
1. Go to Configuration > Accruals > Accrual Rules and click Add.
2. Enter in a description for the accrual rule and click Next.
3. Select whether the rule is or is not based on hours worked:
n
Based: If your employees will be accruing hours according to how many hours they have worked
(e.g., For every hour of work, the employee accrues 0.078 hours of vacation time) then you will
need to create an accrual rule based on hours worked and specify which job codes count towards
those totals.
n
Not Based: If the amount your employees work does not affect how they accrue time (ex: They
receive a balance of accrued time on a specified date, such as their hire date) then you will need to
create an accrual rule not based on hours worked.
4. In the Period Options window, select when the accrual will post and click Next.
5. Read the summary to ensure the rule is set up correctly and press Finish.
6. Once all your rules have been created, go to Configuration > Accruals > Accrual Banks and click Add.
7. Enter a description for the accrual bank and click Next.
8. In the Assign Accrual Rules screen, click Assign to select the accrual rules that will apply to this bank.
9. In the Assign Accrual Usage Job Codes click Assign to select the job codes that the accrued hours will be
applied to.
10. If desired, in the next window an accrual usage cap can be applied to the bank preventing employees
from accruing hours over a specified amount.
11. If desired, in the next window an accrual reset date can be set, at which point all accrued hours will be
reset to an amount that you specify.
12. Once bank settings are complete, click Finish.
13. To assign an accrual bank to an employee, go to Employee > Employee Profiles and select an
employee.
14. Under the Leave tab, expand Accrual Banks.
15. Click Assign to select the banks to assign to this employee. Once complete, click Save.
Enable Automated Reports
To set up Automated Reports, you’ll first need to set up your mail server and have users with valid e-mail
addresses. Once this has been set up, reports can be configured, saved, and sent on an automated basis.
1. To configure your e-mail server, go to Company > Company Defaults.
2. Under the Global tab, expand the option for Mail Settings.
3. Enter in your e-mail server next to SMTP server, and any other relevant settings below that. Once com
plete, click Save.
4. To enter in an e-mail address for your users, browse to Configuration > Users > User Profiles.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
234
5. Select a user from the list to the left and enter their e-mail into the E-mail address field and Save.
6. Go to Hours > Period Reports.
7. Highlight the report that you would like to automate and click the Create Saved Report button.
8. Enter in a Category and Description for the report.
9. Apply any desired filters to the report:
n
Make report visible to all users: If checked, all users with access to Period Reports will see this
saved report. If unchecked, only the user who created the saved report can access it.
n
Save employee filter: If checked, only the individuals you specify will be included in the report.
n
Save job code filter: If checked, only hours worked in the job codes you select will be included in
the report.
n
Save options: Allows you to set the sort order and how the report will appear when generated.
10. Click the Settings button to access the report settings and choose what information will appear on the
report outside of the defaults.
11. Under Report Automation, click the Add button.
12. Enter a description for the automation.
13. Next to User to run automation, choose the user who will be credited with running the report. This user
will need to have a valid e-mail address.
14. Select when you want the report to run and click Next.
15. In the Output Options screen, select how the employees will appear on the report and the file format of
the report.
16. In the Mailing Recipients screen, choose the employees who will be receiving this report.
17. In the E-mail Content screen, you can enter in anything you want to appear in the body of the e-mail.
18. On the Task Scheduling screen, click Add to define when this report will be e-mailed out.
19. Once all settings are complete, click Finish.
Enable Automatic Breaks
Automatic Breaks can be configured to remove a specified amount of time from a shift at a specified time of the
day. These breaks will be set up in Automatic Breaks and then assigned to individual Employee Profiles.
1. Go to Configuration >Other Configurations > Automatic Breaks.
2. Click Add to create an automatic break rule.
3. On the General screen:
n
Description: This is what the automatic break rule will be named.
n
Apply to shifts between: If checked, this automatic break rule will only apply when the shift in
question falls in between the times specified.
n
Rule type: Specify how much time will be removed from the shift and when.
n
Rule Settings: Specify which type of worked hours this rule will apply to.
4. Click Next.
5. Set up any relevant restrictions on the Restrictions screen, including the time of day and day of the week.
6. Choose which job codes this rule will look at on the Assign Job Code screen
7. Click Finish.
8. To assign the automatic break rule, go to Employee > Employee Profiles.
9. Select an employee from the list to the left and, under the Hours tab, expand Automatic Breaks.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
235
10. Click the Assign button, select the rule, and click Assign.
11. Click Save.
Enable Breaks
By default, the ability to go on an unpaid break is automatically enabled within the software. In addition to this,
multiple breaks types can also be enabled, and those breaks can be set as paid or unpaid.
1. To view all break types, go to Company > Company Defaults.
2. Under the Global tab, expand Breaks.
3. To enable a break type, check the Active box.
4. Once activated, the following options will also be available:
n
Break length definitions: You can define what lengths will make up a long break and a short
break.
n
Round breaks to nearest: Allows you to apply a specific rounding time to a break.
5. Click Save.
Enable Dashboard Templates
To select what your users see on their dashboards when they log in, you’ll need to create and assign a Dashboard
Template using the following steps:
1. Go to Configurations > Users > Dashboard Templates.
2. Automatically, all available widgets will appear. You can customize the look of the dashboard by:
n
Removing Widgets: Clicking the red X at the top-right corner of a widget will remove this widget
from the dashboard.
n
Renaming Widgets: All widgets can be renamed by clicking in the title of the widget and editing.
n
Moving Widgets: By clicking and holding down the directional arrows on the top-left of the wid
get, you can drag-and-drop them in any order you prefer.
n
Adding Widgets: The drop-down box inside of each of the Add Widget boxes will allow you to
select a widget type to add to the dashboard.
n
Customizing Widgets: Some widgets will have a Settings or an Options button. These buttons
will allow you to customize what information is displayed inside of the widget.
3. You can choose which employees will be included in the widgets by clicking the Employee Filter button.
4. Once the dashboard is complete, click Save.
5. To apply a Dashboard Template to a user, go to Configurations > Users > User Profiles.
6. Select an existing user in the list at the left or create a new user.
7. On the General tab, click Apply Dashboard Template.
8. Select the template you want to use from the Apply Dashboard Template window and click Apply.
9. Click Save to save the settings for this user.
Enable Recurring Schedules
With Recurring Schedules, employees can be set up on a set schedule that, unless overwritten, will be the same
on a week-to-week basis.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
236
1. In Scheduler, go to Schedules > Recurring Schedule.
2. If you only need to create one recurring schedule to apply to many of your employees, you can click Com
pany Default to edit the default recurring schedule. To create other recurring schedules, begin by clicking
Add.
3. Enter in a description for the recurring schedule, as well as the number of weeks the schedule will include.
You only need to enter in more than one week if each week's schedule will be different. If your employees
will be working the same schedule week-to-week, you will only need one week. Click Save.
4. Create your schedule using the Add buttons below the days of the week. You can also Copy/Paste days by
selecting them and using the options in the Manage menu.
5. To assign the recurring schedule, log in to the Manager application and go to Employee > Employee Pro
files.
6. Under the Hours tab, expand Schedule and click the Assign button.
7. To use the company default recurring schedule, select the first radial button. Otherwise, select the second
and choose the recurring schedule that you created in the Scheduler application. When done, click
Assign, then Save the employee settings.
Enable Requests
Through TimeClock Plus®, employees can submit their time off requests via the client software. Those requests
can then be approved or denied by a manager.
To enable requests:
1. First, you will need to ensure that your employee has an active leave code by going to Employee >Em
ployee Profile > Jobs tab.
2. Next, you will need to enable employee time off requests. Go to Configuration > Other Con
figurations > Clock Configurations and select the relevant configuration from the list to the left. Under
Operations, check Allow time off request. Click Save.
3. Once your employees' job codes are set up and requests have been enabled, your employees can submit
requests into the WebClock by entering in their ID into the Badge/Id Number field and clicking the Log
On To Dashboard button.
4. In the dashboard, click on Requests.
5. Click the Add button to enter a time off request, filling out all fields that are highlighted in red, and click
Save.
6. Once a request has been submitted by an employee, users can change the status of those approvals by
going to Tools > Request Manager.
7. All requests will appear in the calendar below. To approve or deny a request, highlight the request and
click the Manage button.
8. At the bottom of the drop-down menu that appears, there will be Approve and Deny options.
Set Up Shift Differential
To set up Shift Differential, you will need to access both Shift Schedules and Employee Profiles.
1. Go to Configuration > Other Configurations > Shift Schedules.
2. To create your first 24 hour shift schedule, click the Add Schedule button.
3. Enter in a name for your schedule and click Add.
4. Enter in the Start Time for each of your shifts. If you need more than two shifts, you can click the Create
new shift definition button to create up to 24 different definitions.
5. You can edit the order of these shifts and set grace periods by pressing the
button in the Edit column:
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
237
n
Shift: The shift number will appear once the shift differential has processed and will also affect
what order your shift definitions appear in.
n
Translated shift number: This is the shift number that will appear after the shift differential has
processed. The same number as Shift by default.
n
Grace periods: The Before/After shift grace periods allow employees to begin/end the shift X
minutes early/late and have that time count toward this shift. If the employee performs a clock oper
ation outside of the grace period, the shift will be attributed to the next shift.
6. To set how often the shift differential will process, click the Shift Processing button.
7. Ensuring that the Active box is checked, click the Add button to create a processing schedule.
8. Select how often you want the processing to occur in the Execute drop-box, set the time or interval below
that, and click Save.
9. Once all shifts have been defined and your shift processing is set up, click Save.
10. To assign the shift schedules, go to Employee > Employee Profiles.
11. Select an employee and go to Payroll > Shift Differential.
12. Select the shift schedule from the drop-down box and click Save.
Enable Time Sheets
If you need to enable time sheets for your system, doing so will require a multiple step setup involving clock con
figurations and job codes.
1. Go to Configurations > Other Configurations > Clock Configuration.
2. Select a clock configuration or create a new one. In the Operations section, choose one of the three
options:
n
Time sheet is not allowed: Time sheets will be disabled completely within the clock con
figuration.
n
Allow employee to manually enter time based time sheets from client applications: This
will allow the employee to enter in a time sheet with a start time and end time (e.g. 9:00 am to 5:00
pm).
n
Allow employee to manually enter amount based time sheets from client applications:
This will allow the employee to enter a time sheet with a flat amount of time as opposed to an end
time (e.g. eight hours anchored to 9:00 am).
3. Save the clock configuration. If you have not already done so, add the configuration to a clock device via
Clock Status, or to the employee via the Access Tab.
4. Next, browse to Configuration > Job Codes, and select a job code that you would like to allow time
sheets for.
5. Under the Defaults section on the General tab, place a check mark next to Allow time sheet entry, and
click Save. Repeat for any other job codes that will need time sheets enabled.
6. If the job codes in question have already been applied to employees, then the job codes will need to be
modified on the employee level. This can be done via Employee Profiles or through the Global Modi
fication tool.
n
If using Employee Profiles: Browse to the Jobs Tab. Click on the icon in the Edit column, and
place a check next to Allow time sheet entry. Save the job code and the employee's profile.
n
If using Global Modification: Select the employee(s) on the first screen, then choose Jobs >
Job Codes > Modify job code. Select the job code(s) that will receive the change, and select Yes
next to Allow time sheet entry. Finish the wizard.
7. Browse to Company > Company Defaults, and select the Client Tab. Under the Miscellaneous section,
specify amounts of days in the Allow time sheet entry up to __ day(s) in the future and __ day(s)
in the past fields as needed. Please note that if both amounts are set at zero, then time sheets will only be
allowed for today.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
238
Glossary
A
Absent Segment
An Absent Segment is a segment for which an employee was scheduled to work
for, but did not record any hours worked during that time.
Accrual Bank
The accrual bank is assigned one or more accrual rules that determine how
much time an employee has available to be used in the job codes assigned to
that bank.
Accrual Rule
A rule that determines when and how often an employee earns time that can be
used for time off or comp time based on seniority and/or time worked.
Accruals
Leave time an employee earns at defined intervals. When an employee logs time
in one of the accrual job codes, then the appropriate balance is deducted from
the accrual total. Accruals post whenever weeks are closed within TimeClock
Manager.
Active
Employees and anything that can be assigned to them (job codes, automatic
break rules, accrual banks, etc.) must be active in order to actually be used. Inactive employees and items will still exist, but cannot be used until reactivated.
ADMIN
This is the name of the top-level user within TimeClock Plus, who always has
unlimited access to the whole of the TimeClock Plus software. In previous versions of the software, this user was called SUPERVISOR.
Approval
Employees, managers, and other parties can verify that the employees’ hours are
correct via the Individual, Manager, and Other approval levels. Any other
employee exceptions can also be approved/unapproved, and these can optionally be set as a requirement before running a payroll export or closing the week.
Approvals
Employees, managers, and other parties can verify that the employees’ hours are
correct via the Individual, Manager, and Other approval levels. Any other
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
239
employee exceptions can also be approved/unapproved, and these can optionally be set as a requirement before running a payroll export or closing the week.
Auto Out
A job code can be configured to automatically clock out with a specified amount
of hours. As soon as an employee clocks into the job code, he or she will be
clocked out with the number of hours entered.
Automatic Rounding
Automatic rounding will round Clock In and Clock Out operations to the nearest
defined time. Enabling this option does not round the Go On Break operation,
since break lengths use their own internal rounding function.
Automation
This refers to an automatic process within TimeClock Plus. Specifically, Shift Differential, AutoImport, and Automated Reports all use a common automation process to perform their tasks.
Automation Utility
This refers to an automatic process within TimeClock Plus. Specifically, Shift Differential, AutoImport, and Automated Reports all use a common automation process to perform their tasks.
Available
Available segments are scheduled segments where an employee is not scheduled to work but is available to be called in if necessary.
Available Segment
Available segments are scheduled segments where an employee is not scheduled to work but is available to be called in if necessary.
B
Badge
The Badge field on the employees’ profiles is an alternate way for the system to
identify the employees when they perform a clock operation through magnetic,
barcode, and proximity badges. Badges, unlike employee ID numbers, can contain alphabetical characters and symbols.
Badge Number
The Badge field on the employees’ profiles is an alternate way for the system to
identify the employees when they perform a clock operation through magnetic,
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
240
barcode, and proximity badges. Badges, unlike employee ID numbers, can contain alphabetical characters and symbols.
Break
A break is a measured space between two segments. When an employee uses
the Go On Break button, then they are clocked out on a break. When the
employee clocks back in, a new segment is created and tied to the previous one,
and a break length is recorded. Breaks can also be set up as automatic deductions, if needed.
Budget Dollars
The allotted amount of money assigned to a cost code, for use with the Cost
Code Budget Report.
Budget Hours
The allotted amount of time assigned to a cost code, for use with the Cost Code
Budget Report.
C
Calculation Module
Hour calculation modules are option modules that alter how employees’ hours
are calculated. Calculation modules can be configured as needed on a company-wide basis, or on a per-employee basis.
Calculation Modules
Hour calculation modules are option modules that alter how employees’ hours
are calculated. Calculation modules can be configured as needed on a company-wide basis, or on a per-employee basis.
Calculator
TimeClock Plus has a simple calculator that works like a common office calculator, except this one is capable of converting from decimal values to hour and
minute values, making it handy for calculating amounts of time.
Class
This is a numeric value that can be applied to a group of employees for filtering
and sorting purposes.
Classification
This is a numeric value that can be applied to a group of employees for filtering
and sorting purposes.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
241
Clock Config
These are the settings that can be configured for employee clock operations. By
default, each employee entry location uses a company default, but it is possible
to create additional configurations for other purposes as well.
Clock Configuration
These are the settings that can be configured for employee clock operations. By
default, each employee entry location uses a company default, but it is possible
to create additional configurations for other purposes as well.
Clock Operation
Clock operations are actions an employee performs that affect their hours
worked, such as clocking in, clocking out, going on break, or changing job codes.
Clockable
When a job code is marked as clockable, it means that the employee will be able
to clock into that code. Typically, this would be enabled for any job code that the
employee could clock into.
Close Week
Whenever a user closes the week, the week’s hours are archived and new accruals are posted. Because of the importance of this operation, weeks will need to
be closed regularly. Up to eight weeks (56 days) can be open at a time in TimeClock Plus; any more than that, and employees will not be able to clock in.
Company Default
These are the global settings for your company.
Company Defaults
These are the global settings for your company.
Company Settings
These are the global settings for your company.
Compose Message
Messages can be sent to all employees, a selection of employees, or a single
employee. The employees typically can view messages when performing a clock
operation.
Contract
If a worker is contracted for a set number of hours, a contract can be created that
defines these hours per day, then is assigned to the employee's profile. Once the
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
242
employee has clocked hours in the system, the employee’s actual hours can then
be compared to the contracted hours within a Contract Variance report.
Contracts
If a worker is contracted for a set number of hours, a contract can be created that
defines these hours per day, then is assigned to the employee's profile. Once the
employee has clocked hours in the system, the employee’s actual hours can then
be compared to the contracted hours within a Contract Variance report.
Cost Code
A cost code is generally a task that an employee can perform during the course
of working through their regular job. For instance, an employee working under a
“Carpenter” job code could clock into a cost code reflecting a client’s location, or
a particular crafting project.
Cost Codes
A cost code is generally a task that an employee can perform during the course
of working through their regular job. For instance, an employee working under a
“Carpenter” job code could clock into a cost code reflecting a client’s location, or
a particular crafting project.
Criteria
The Filter button to is used to filter employees. Filtering can be performed for
many categories of information. By default, all suspended and terminated individuals are filtered out; and regardless of any filtering, features will only display
the employees that the logged-in user has access to.
Custom Field
Custom fields are user-created fields that can be used to store extra information
that may be needed for tracking and filtering purposes. Custom Fields are also
sometimes added by certain modules for extra functionality.
Custom Fields
Custom fields are user-created fields that can be used to store extra information
that may be needed for tracking and filtering purposes. Custom Fields are also
sometimes added by certain modules for extra functionality.
D
Dashboard
This is the main page within TimeClock Manager and TimeClock Scheduler, and
can be accessed by the house icon in the toolbar. It is also the first page that
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
243
opens when a user logs in, so it is possible to configure this page to include widgets to show the user a variety of useful information at a glance.
Dashboard Widget
This is a mini-utility that can be configured to display on the Dashboard when a
user logs in. These can be configured to show punch exceptions, reminders,
employees approaching overtime, pending time off requests, and employee
events.
Database
Within the context of TimeClock Plus, the database is the centralized location
where all the data – employee data, user data, hour data, settings, and so on – is
stored. It is recommended that the database run in a server environment, or on a
computer that does not shut down or hibernate.
Department
This alphanumeric field is used for sorting both employees and users, and is useful when it comes to sorting employees via Employee Filter.
Dept
This alphanumeric field is used for sorting both employees and users, and is useful when it comes to sorting employees via Employee Filter.
Download
When saving reports or certain other information from TimeClock Plus, it is possible to save the information as a HTML, PDF, and OpenXML document.
Downloads
When saving reports or certain other information from TimeClock Plus, it is possible to save the information as a HTML, PDF, and OpenXML document.
E
Edit Log
TimeClock Plus keeps a meticulous record of any modifications that are made to
the information contained within. These logs are accessible in case you need to
audit your edit records, or view a previous record in case of an accidental edit.
Employee
An employee is an individual whose time and information is tracked within
TimeClock Plus. Generally, the term “Employee” is also synonymous with “Individual.”
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
244
Employee Filter
The Filter button to is used to filter employees. Filtering can be performed for
many categories of information. By default, all suspended and terminated individuals are filtered out; and regardless of any filtering, features will only display
the employees that the logged-in user has access to.
Employee Messaging
Messages can be sent to all employees, a selection of employees, or a single
employee. The employees typically can view messages when performing a clock
operation.
Employee Role
Employee Roles are settings that will be shared among certain employees, such
as job codes, departments, overtime settings, and exceptions.
Employee Roles
Employee Roles are settings that will be shared among certain employees, such
as job codes, departments, overtime settings, and exceptions.
Employee Schedule
A schedule is the potential hours that an employee could work. Schedules are
typically entered to allow the employees to know what they’re working, but can
also be used to set restrictions on clock operations, and track tardies and
absences. Schedules are handled within TimeClock Scheduler.
Employee Segment
When referring to hours within TimeClock Plus, a segment describes just that: a
singular segment of time. A basic segment will be comprised of a single line
within Group or Individual Manage Hours, and typically contains a start time and
end time, as well as a job code. Segments can be tied together to create shifts.
Employee Shift
A shift is one or more segments tied together by break[s] or job code changes,
that constitute an employee's work during the day.
Employee Status
Employee Status provides a quick overview of which employees are clocked in,
where they are clocked in, as well as which employees may be absent or on
leave.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
245
Exception
Exceptions are used to track any variance in worked segments, such as tardiness, missed punches, or a lack of approval. Segment exceptions can also be
configured to prevent payroll exports, closing the week, or employee clock operations.
Exception Filter
The Exception Filter allows users to filter employee segments to only include
those that have certain unapproved exceptions. This filter can also be used to
quickly see what segments require approval before the week can be closed or
those hours can be exported.
Export
There are a wide variety of options available for extracting, or exporting, information from TimeClock Plus, be it for information storage, payroll purposes, or
other needs.
Export Code
The Export Code field is commonly used when exporting data to a third-party
payroll software. This field needs to reflect the code or identifier that the payroll
software uses to identify the employee.
G
Global Modification
Global Modification is a tool that allows settings and job code adjustments to be
performed for multiple employees or employee roles. You can use the Global
Modification utility to modify these settings all at once.
Global Scheduler
This can be used to apply, copy/overwrite, and delete schedules for multiple
employees. The tool can also modify scheduled segments en masse, and it can
transfer scheduled segments into TimeClock Manager as actual hours.
H
Holiday
Holidays are defined within the Holiday Calendar, then can be used in conjunction with advanced overtime settings. Placing a holiday into the calendar
does not automatically assign holiday time-off to employees, though this can be
done through other means.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
246
Holiday Calendar
Holidays are defined within the Holiday Calendar, then can be used in conjunction with advanced overtime settings. Placing a holiday into the calendar
does not automatically assign holiday time-off to employees, though this can be
done through other means.
Hour Calculation Module
Hour calculation modules are option modules that alter how employees’ hours
are calculated. Calculation modules can be configured as needed on a company-wide basis, or on a per-employee basis.
Hour Calculation Modules
Hour calculation modules are option modules that alter how employees’ hours
are calculated. Calculation modules can be configured as needed on a company-wide basis, or on a per-employee basis.
Hour Edit Log
TimeClock Plus keeps a meticulous record of any modifications that are made to
the information contained within. These logs are accessible in case you need to
audit your edit records, or view a previous record in case of an accidental edit.
Hours Edit Log
TimeClock Plus keeps a meticulous record of any modifications that are made to
the information contained within. These logs are accessible in case you need to
audit your edit records, or view a previous record in case of an accidental edit.
I
Inactive
Employees and anything that can be assigned to them (job codes, automatic
break rules, accrual banks, etc.) must be active in order to actually be used. Inactive employees and items will still exist, but cannot be used until reactivated.
Individual
An employee is an individual whose time and information is tracked within
TimeClock Plus. Generally, the term “Employee” is also synonymous with “Individual.”
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
247
J
Job Code
A job code will correspond to the task that an employee works during a period of
time. However, a job code can also be used to track any kind of time in TimeClock Plus (e.g. any worked time, as well as any leave/bonus time that a manager
might enter), aside from breaks, which are tracked separetely.
Job Codes
A job code will correspond to the task that an employee works during a period of
time. However, a job code can also be used to track any kind of time in TimeClock Plus (e.g. any worked time, as well as any leave/bonus time that a manager
might enter), aside from breaks, which are tracked separetely.
Job Costing
A cost code is generally a task that an employee can perform during the course
of working through their regular job. For instance, an employee working under a
“Carpenter” job code could clock into a cost code reflecting a client’s location, or
a particular crafting project.
L
Leave Code
A leave code is a job code that has been marked as Leave in the Job Code List.
This is typically done to make these codes available for employees entering a
time-off request, but it can also be used to define the code as leave. It is advised
that you make these codes non-clockable, since users typically enter leave time
manually.
Long Day
The long day exception allows users to track employee hours that exceed a certain amount in their shift. This is useful for employees who are authorized to work
a certain amount of time past overtime, or need to have their hours limited for
other reasons.
Long Week
The long week exception allows users to track employee hours that exceed a certain amount in the TimeClock week. This is useful for employees who are authorized to work a certain amount of time past overtime, or need to have their hours
limited for other reasons.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
248
M
Mail Settings
Mail Settings are required for TimeClock Plus to send e-mail to employees and
users. These settings require an SMTP server and port, and you can set encryption and authentication as needed.
Manager Override
If an employee is unable to perform a clock operation due to a restriction, then it
is possible to configure a user to override that restriction with a password. Passwords can be configured in the user profiles, and overrides can be performed on
the WebClock and on terminals.
Messaging
Messages can be sent to all employees, a selection of employees, or a single
employee. The employees typically can view messages when performing a clock
operation.
Missed Punch
TimeClock Plus relies on continuity for its punches, meaning that a Clock In must
always be partnered with a Clock Out or a Go On Break operation. If one of these
punches is missed, then the continuity is not maintained, and the system will
need to know how to handle the error.
Missed Punches
TimeClock Plus relies on continuity for its punches, meaning that a Clock In must
always be partnered with a Clock Out or a Go On Break operation. If one of these
punches is missed, then the continuity is not maintained, and the system will
need to know how to handle the error.
Module
Modules are additional features that can be added to your TimeClock Plus installation to suit the needs of your organization. Modules are available for payroll
export, special hour calculations, hardware additions, login settings, and more.
Modules
Modules are additional features that can be added to your TimeClock Plus installation to suit the needs of your organization. Modules are available for payroll
export, special hour calculations, hardware additions, login settings, and more.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
249
My Dashboard
This is the main page within TimeClock Manager and TimeClock Scheduler, and
can be accessed by the house icon in the toolbar. It is also the first page that
opens when a user logs in, so it is possible to configure this page to include widgets to show the user a variety of useful information at a glance.
My Quicklinks
QuickLinks are shortcuts to features within TimeClock Manager or Scheduler. To
create this shortcut, choose the feature, and click on the star next to the utility’s
name. The feature will then be accessible through the “My QuickLinks” menu in
the top toolbar.
N
Non-Clockable
A non-clockable job code is a job code that employees are unable to clock themselves into. These are commonly used for leave codes, or to keep track of time
that the employee is not actively working.
O
Off Segment
Off segments are segments where an employee is not scheduled to come in.
On-Call
On-Call segments are scheduled segments where the employee is not scheduled to be present, but could be expected to be called in.
On-Call Segments
On-Call segments are scheduled segments where the employee is not scheduled to be present, but could be expected to be called in.
Other Approval
Other is an optional approval category used for a third person to sign off on an
employee's hours. For example, an operations officer or HR manager could be
required to approve hours.
Override
If an employee is unable to perform a clock operation due to a restriction, then it
is possible to configure a user to override that restriction with a password. Passwords can be configured in the user profiles, and overrides can be performed on
the WebClock and on terminals.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
250
Overtime
There are two separate overtime options available within TimeClock Plus. By
default, Overtime 1 corresponds to time-and-a-half (x1.5), and Overtime 2 corresponds to double-time (x2). One, both, or neither of these options can be used;
and each overtime multiplier can be altered, depending on your needs.
P
Payroll Export
If you need to export hour info for a certain period, then this can be done via the
Period Export option. This allows you to put the data in a format that your payroll
software can read. There are already a few simple built-in export formats, but it is
also possible to use an export module that matches your payroll software’s
format.
Payroll Reports
These contain different options for bringing certain information out of TimeClock
Plus, typically for tracking purposes. Each report can be configured via the Settings button.
Period Export
If you need to export hour info for a certain period, then this can be done via the
Period Export option. This allows you to put the data in a format that your payroll
software can read. There are already a few simple built-in export formats, but it is
also possible to use an export module that matches your payroll software’s
format.
Period Reports
These contain different options for bringing certain information out of TimeClock
Plus, typically for tracking purposes. Each report can be configured via the Settings button.
PIN
A Personal Identification Number, which is meant to be classified and acts as an
additional layer of security when an employee performs a clock operation.
Punch
This refers to a singular operation that either begins or ends a segment. For
instance, Clock In, Clock Out, Go On Break, and Change Job Code (or Cost
Code) are all considered punches.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
251
Q
QuickLink
QuickLinks are shortcuts to features within TimeClock Manager or Scheduler. To
create this shortcut, choose the feature, and click on the star next to the utility’s
name. The feature will then be accessible through the “My QuickLinks” menu in
the top toolbar.
QuickLinks
QuickLinks are shortcuts to features within TimeClock Manager or Scheduler. To
create this shortcut, choose the feature, and click on the star next to the utility’s
name. The feature will then be accessible through the “My QuickLinks” menu in
the top toolbar.
R
Rate
TimeClock Plus is capable of tracking hourly wages per employee or per job
code, for the purpose of calculating estimated wages.
Recurring Schedule
A recurring schedule is a standardized schedule of one or more weeks that can
be applied to an employee for an extended period of time.
Reminder
If a user needs to remind themselves to perform a task, then they can make use
of the Reminder widget. This allows the user to post a reminder note and tie it to
a date, then mark the reminder as complete once the task is done.
Reports
These contain different options for bringing certain information out of TimeClock
Plus, typically for tracking purposes. Each report can be configured via the Settings button.
Resolve Period
The Resolve Period button will automatically approve all selected exceptions
that fall within the viewed date range.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
252
S
Salaried
Exempt employees can be marked as Salaried in the overtime tab. Doing this will
allow you to filter these individuals out of any payroll exports or reports, if necessary.
Saved Report
Reports an be saved with certain settings and filters enabled for later use. The
saved report will then retain any settings and filtering that you set for it.
Schedule
A schedule is the potential hours that an employee could work. Schedules are
typically entered to allow the employees to know what they’re working, but can
also be used to set restrictions on clock operations, and track tardies and
absences. Schedules are handled within TimeClock Scheduler.
Schedule Rounding
If an employee clocks in or out during a period of time around their scheduled
time in or out, then it is possible to round the time to said scheduled time. This is
configured in the employee profile.
Schedule Template
This is a schedule segment that you can prepare in advance, for a segment, a
day, or a week; and containing an in and out punch, a job code, a segment type,
and an optional break type and description. Once created, this can be easily
applied to an employee’s schedule.
Schedule Templates
This is a schedule segment that you can prepare in advance, for a segment, a
day, or a week; and containing an in and out punch, a job code, a segment type,
and an optional break type and description. Once created, this can be easily
applied to an employee’s schedule.
Schedule Variance
Schedule variant exceptions are exceptions that track when an employee performs a clock operation outside a certain number of minutes from their scheduled
segments. The four schedule variance exceptions are early clock in, late clock in,
early clock out, and late clock out.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
253
Segment
When referring to hours within TimeClock Plus, a segment describes just that: a
singular segment of time. A basic segment will be comprised of a single line
within Group or Individual Manage Hours, and typically contains a start time and
end time, as well as a job code. Segments can be tied together to create shifts.
Shift
A shift is one or more segments tied together by break[s] or job code changes,
that constitute an employee's work during the day.
SUPERVISOR
This is the name of the top-level user within TimeClock Plus, who always has
unlimited access to the whole of the TimeClock Plus software. In previous versions of the software, this user was called SUPERVISOR.
System Base Date
This is set during the company setup process, and tells the system when the
weeks start for the purpose of calculating overtime. If this needs to be changed
after the fact, please contact the TimeClock Plus Technical Support department.
System Time
By default, TimeClock Plus retrieves its time from the server that the database
runs on. However, it is also possible to use this time adjusted to a specific time
zone, which is useful if your server is in another time zone than your company; or
to use the local system time of the application server (where the web client runs).
System Update
To ensure that your version of TimeClock Plus has the most up-to-date features,
we recommend running updates with a degree of regularity. Updates typically are
used to fix issues, update calculation settings, and enhance features.
T
Tardy
This is an indication of how late an employee is, by comparing actual clocked
hours against any scheduled hours. In TimeClock Plus, within the employees’
restriction settings, there are two thresholds that can be set for minutes late (e.g.
5 minutes for Tardy1, and 10 minutes for Tardy2).
Terminal
A terminal is a physical time clock device that connects to the TimeClock Plus
database, that the employees can use to perform clock operations. Terminals can
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
254
be managed via the Manage Clocks function.
Time Settings
By default, TimeClock Plus retrieves its time from the server that the database
runs on. However, it is also possible to use this time adjusted to a specific time
zone, which is useful if your server is in another time zone than your company; or
to use the local system time of the application server (where the web client runs).
TimeClock Manager
This is the main program within the TimeClock Plus system. Manager allows
users to input and track employee information, job information, and hour information. It also manages many system-wide configuration settings.
TimeClock Scheduler
This program is used to manage and track employees’ schedules. For this
reason, it is a completely separate and distinct application, although Manager
and Scheduler can and do share information (e.g. for schedule variance information).
TimeClock Week
The current week within TimeClock Plus. This is often different than the actual
current week, and can be up to eight weeks (or 56 days) behind the current date
to allow for payroll processing.
Timeout
As a security feature, TimeClock Plus will automatically log a user out of Manager and Scheduler after 15 minutes of inactivity, and will log an employee out of
the WebClock after five minutes of inactivity. The system will provide a 30
second countdown warning beforehand, with the option to renew the timeout.
Tracked Field
Tracked fields are typically used for tracking tips, commissions, mileage, and so
on. Up to three tracked fields can be defined within the company settings,
depending on what you need to track.
Tracked Fields
Tracked fields are typically used for tracking tips, commissions, mileage, and so
on. Up to three tracked fields can be defined within the company settings,
depending on what you need to track.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
255
U
Unavailable
Unavailable segments are scheduled segments where an employee is not scheduled and will be unable to come in.
Unavailable Segments
Unavailable segments are scheduled segments where an employee is not scheduled and will be unable to come in.
Unresolved Punch
Generally, these are punches that have been uploaded from a fallback-enabled
terminal, but cannot be reconciled within the system due to clock restrictions,
missed punches, or other exceptions.
Unresolved Punches
Generally, these are punches that have been uploaded from a fallback-enabled
terminal, but cannot be reconciled within the system due to clock restrictions,
missed punches, or other exceptions.
User
A user in TimeClock Plus is someone who logs into the management side of the
software (TimeClock Manager and TimeClock Scheduler), someone who performs clock operation overrides for employees, and/or someone who enrolls
employees in any available biometric options. Usually, a user may be a manager
or payroll clerk.
User Role
User Roles are predefined permissions that can be created and assigned to a
user through the permissions tab, and prevent similar users from having to have
their access rights set up one at a time.
User Roles
User Roles are predefined permissions that can be created and assigned to a
user through the permissions tab, and prevent similar users from having to have
their access rights set up one at a time.
Users
A user in TimeClock Plus is someone who logs into the management side of the
software (TimeClock Manager and TimeClock Scheduler), someone who performs clock operation overrides for employees, and/or someone who enrolls
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
256
employees in any available biometric options. Usually, a user may be a manager
or payroll clerk.
V
View Hour
A user can view hours via Individual Hours and Group Hours within TimeClock
Manager, and can see hour totals for the week via the Employee Status tool. In
addition, employees can view and approve their own hours via the View Hours
utility within the WebClock.
View Hours
A user can view hours via Individual Hours and Group Hours within TimeClock
Manager, and can see hour totals for the week via the Employee Status tool. In
addition, employees can view and approve their own hours via the View Hours
utility within the WebClock.
W
WebClock
This is the web-based utility that the employees will use to perform clock operations, as well as view and approve hours, see schedules, read messages, and
look at other information.
Widget
This is a mini-utility that can be configured to display on the Dashboard when a
user logs in. These can be configured to show punch exceptions, reminders,
employees approaching overtime, pending time off requests, and employee
events.
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
257
Index
1
100/200 Series
Ethernet 231
serial 232
3
300/400 Series clock devices 225
A
about 5
Access 62, 70, 86, 89, 96, 98, 100, 134, 162, 165, 172, 185-186, 211, 222, 224, 227
access tab
Employee Profiles 62
accrual history
viewing and editing 26
accrual usage information 38
accruals
accrual banks 122
assigning an accrual bank to an employee 125
assigning and removing banks 59
creating accrual rules based on hours worked 119
modifying banks 59
overview 117
setup 234
viewing an employee's ledger 60
Accruals tab 26
add segment notes 21
adding a request 86
adding a schedule
globally 197
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
258
per individual 183
adding a user 93
adding an employee 47
adding breaks 23, 30
adding segments
Group Hours 28
Individual Hours 20
adding time 20, 28
Admin Server 7
Database Operations 7
Backup 8
Connection Settings 7
Restore 8
Database Upgrade 11
Namespaces 9
update 12
anniversary report 38
approaching overtime report 35
approving exceptions
Group Hours 29
Individual Hours 22
approving segments 208
approving shifts
Group Hours 29
Individual Hours 22
assigning a configuration to a terminal 224
assigning a user role 101
assigning request templates to employees 148
assigning specific employees to a user 97
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
259
attendance monitor 89
auto transfer schedule information 181
autoimport 163
automated import 163
setup 165
using 166
viewing logs 166
automated reports
setup 234
automatic breaks
setup 235
Automatic Breaks 153
adding 154
assigning to an employee 156
B
backing up a database 8
badge processing 224
configuring for legacy terminals 225
configuring for RDTg 224
birthday report 38
break totals report 38
breaks
automatic 153
configuring 130
setup 236
breaks tab
Job Codes 105
C
Calculations 128, 172, 179
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
260
call note 83
changing job codes via employee status 83
client tab
Company Defaults 134
Clock Configurations 144
adding 144
assigning 62
operations 145
options 146
restrictions 146
clock devices 214
clock settings tab
Clock Status 218
Clock Status 214
adding a clock through location 214
adding a legacy ethernet clock 215
adding a legacy serial clock 216
clock settings tab 218
general tab 217
managing clocks 217
operation settings 219
punch settings tab 219
QuickPunch 220
clocking in
substitutes 179
via WebClock 204
clocking out
employee status 83
via WebClock 205
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
261
clocks 214
close week 126
frequent errors 127
undoing 127
Close Week 33, 58, 133
cogent fingerprint
configuring for legacy 221
configuring for RDTg 220
data 224
company
creation 9
deletion 10
license file upload 10
company-wide bulletin 73
Company Defaults 127
client tab 134
global tab 127
manager tab 132
schedule tab 133
Company Menu 163
company settings 127
complete payroll report 35
configuration menu 92
configuring digital output 223
contract details report 38
contract first 152, 168
contract variance report 38
contracts 169
assigning 170
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
262
clearing hours 170
creating templates 169
cost code budget report 37
cost code groups 112
assigning to employees 114
assigning to job codes 114
creating 113
editing 113
testing 114
cost code list view 115
cost code punch detail report 37
cost code summary 37
cost code summary by individual 37
cost code usage report 37
cost codes
creating 108, 115-116
deleting 115-116
editing 115-116
grouping 113
manage branch 108
activate 110
copy 108
deactivating 111
delete 109
simple select 107
tree view 116
cost codes list 115
creating a company 9
creating a shift schedule 149, 175
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
263
creating a user role 101
creating accrual rules not based on hours worked 117
cumulative hours 61
custom field
input types 138
custom fields 138
creating 139
deleting 143
editing 143
custom fields tab
Employee Profiles 68
Job Codes 107
D
Daily Overall Schedule 185
navigation 185
options 185
daily overtime exemption 168
dashboard templates
setup 236
database
backup 8
connection settings 7
restoration 8
upgrade 11
database connections 7
database operations 7
day breakdown report 35
deleting a company 10
deleting a user 94
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
264
deleting an employee 49
deleting segments
Group Hours 29
Individual Hours 21
deleting time 21, 29
department
creating a new employee department 50
creating a new user department 95
digital persona
configuring for RDTg 223
data 224
E
edit history 90
editing a template 194
editing segments
Group Hours 28
Individual Hours 21
editing time 21
email settings 131
employee access tab
User Profiles 96
employee accrual bank report 38
employee contracts 169
Employee Filter 17
employee information report 38
Employee Menu 46
employee messaging 73
Employee Profiles 46
access tab 62
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
265
adding 47
assigning a role 48
custom fields tab 68
deleting 49
exceptions tab 63
hours tab 57
jobs tab 51
leave tab 58
overtime tab 55
payroll tab 61
personnel tab 66
photo 49
rate change history 54
employee roles 68
assigning 70
creating 69
deleting 71
editing 69
Employee Status 81
call note 83
options 84
enabling shift scheduling on job codes and employees 152, 178
estimated wages report 35
exception filter 33
exception summary report 38
exceptions tab
Employee Profiles 63
Export 19, 42-43, 50, 75, 79, 165, 183
exportable information 80
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
266
options 80
F
fallback mode 220
filter 17
employees 17
job codes 18
Filter 17-19, 27, 33, 37, 43, 47, 82, 86, 89, 93, 96, 102, 138, 185-186, 197, 224, 236
flexible time of day 171
floating pay period 171
forced overtime 172
configuring 172
future cost of accruals report 38
G
general clock settings 217
general tab
Clock Status 217
Job Codes 104
User Options 162
User Profiles 95
Global Modification 72
Global Scheduler 197
applying schedules 197
copying schedules 197
deleting schedules 199
modifying schedules 199
transfer job code information 201
global tab
Company Defaults 127
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
267
Group Hours 27
options 30
GT-400 228
H
handscanner
configuring 222
data 224
setup 228
hardware extension configurations 220
hardware extension data 224
hardware extensions tab 224
Holidays 158
creating 158
Hours Audit Log 90
performing an audit 91
Hours Menu 19
hours tab
Employee Profiles 57
How To 234
enable automated reports 234
enable automatic breaks 235
enable breaks 236
enable dashboard templates 236
enable recurring schedules 236
enable requests 237
enable time sheets 238
set up accruals 234
set up shift differential 237
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
268
I
import 76
importing
delimited file 77
fixed length file 77
include overtime in regular hours 163
configuring 163
individual cost code summary 37
individual costing detail 37
individual exception report 35
Individual Hours 19
Accruals tab 26
individual hours options 24
individual job report 36
information tab
User Profiles 49
introduction 5
J
Job Code 18-20, 28, 36, 43, 47, 52, 69, 76, 80, 82, 85, 89-91, 98, 104-105, 140, 147, 151, 153, 164, 168-169,
177, 183, 185-186, 189, 192, 195, 198, 207, 213, 225, 235
job code access tab
User Profiles 98
job code adjustments 151, 177
job code analysis detail report 36
job code analysis summary report 36
Job Code Filter 18
job code group detail 36
job code group summary 36
job code information report 36
job code overtime report 36
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
269
job code split report 37
Job Codes 102
adding 102
assigning to an employee 52
breaks tab 105
changing employee's defaults 54
changing settings per employee 52
custom fields tab 107
deleting 103
deleting from an employee 54
general tab 104
jobs tab
Employee Profiles 51
L
Last Punch 82, 209, 231
LDAP 172
configuring 172
employees 173
users 173
leave tab
Employee Profiles 58
legacy terminals 229
Ethernet 231
serial 232
using 229
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 172
M
mail settings 131
Manage Automatic Break Rules 153
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
270
manage branch 108
manage clock configuration 144
manage employee 46
manage hours
group mode 27
individual mode 19
Manage Photo 49
Manage Recurring Schedule 188
Company Default 190
manage request templates 147
manage requests 211
Manage Schedule 182
adding and manipulating segments 183
options 184
Manage Schedule Template 191
manage unresolved offline punches 88
manage users 93
manager tab
Company Defaults 132
managing company bulletins 75
managing individual messages 75
manually processing shifts 152, 178
mass approving exceptions
Group Hours 29
Individual Hours 23
messaging 73
Missed Punches 34, 135, 204-205
modifying a scheduled segment 199
modules 163
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
271
My Options 161
My QuickLinks 16
N
namespaces 9
new organization wizard 13
O
offline punches 88
overtime
employee setup 55
Overtime 20, 34-35, 42, 53, 55, 69, 105, 121, 153, 163, 168, 171-174, 179
overtime report 36
overtime tab
Employee Profiles 55
P
paid break limit 173
Password 15, 131, 221, 225-226
password policy 131
passwords
Clock Edit Hours 100
Clock override 100
system access 100
WebClock override 100
passwords tab
User Options 162
User Profiles 100
payroll detail report 36
payroll export 43
template 44
payroll summary report 36
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
272
payroll tab
Employee Profiles 61
period accrual information report 38
Period Export 43
templates 44
period individual cost report (detail) 38
period individual cost report (summary) 38
period report (detail) 37
period report (summary) 37
period report (variance) 37
Period Reports 35
accruals reports 38
automating 39
configuring 39
contract reports 38
cost code reports 37
job code reports 36
miscellaneous reports 38
options 41
other reports 38
payroll reports 35
period reports 37
print options 42
saving 39
scheduler reports 37
permissions tab
User Profiles 99
personal info 50
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
273
personnel tab
Employee Profiles 66
PIN 51, 134, 146, 203
punch location report 38
punch settings tab
Clock Status 219
Q
quad weekly overtime 174
configuring 174
QuickLinks 16
QuickPunch 220
R
rate change history 54
RDTg 225
badge processing 224
clock operations 227
registering and configuring 227
recurring schedules 188
assigning 191
company default 190
creating 188
deactivating 189
deleting 189
editing 189
setup 236
reports
automating 39
configuring 39
options 41
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
274
saving 39
Request Manager 86
approving and denying 88
deleting 88
editing 87
request templates 147
requests
approving and denying 88
deleting 88
editing 87
management 86
setup 237
restoring a database 8
rounding 57
S
salaried non-exempt 174
saved reports 39
schedule request report 38
schedule tab
Company Defaults 133
schedule tempates 191
schedule templates
day templates 192
deleting 194
segment template 191
using 194
week template 193
schedule variance report 37
schedule vs actual report 37
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
275
schedule vs. actual breakdown report 37
scheduled job code analysis detail report 37
scheduled job code analysis summary report 37
Scheduler 182
logging in 182
Schedules menu 182
schedules
recurring 188
templates 191
schedules tab 26
Segment 20, 133, 152, 178, 183, 188, 192
selected job code report 37
sending a company-wide bulletin 73
sending an individual message 74
shift differential 149, 175
setup 237
shift note report 36
Sort 19, 27, 47, 93, 102, 138, 154, 182
splitting segments 23, 29, 209
add break 23, 30
by length 23, 29
by percentage 23, 29
Staffing Requirements 195
creating 195
required segments 195
substitute module 178
clocking in 179
configuring job codes 178
configuring subbed-for employees 179
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
276
substitute report 39
supplemental pay report 36
system-wide settings 127
system requirements 6
system update 12
T
terminals 214
time coverage report 38
time settings 131
time sheet entry 45
time sheets 45
setup 238
TimeClock Manager 13
logging in 15
navigating 15
TimeClock Scheduler 182
logging in 182
title page 1
toggle breaks
Group Hours 30
Individual Hours 23
Tools Menu 75
tracked information summary report 36
Transfer Job Code Information 201
U
unclosing a week 127
Unresolved Punches 88
updates 12
upgrading a database 11
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
277
uploading a license file 10
uploading RDTg connection settings via USB 227
User 13, 22, 40, 45, 51, 90, 96, 98-99, 101, 131, 161, 182, 214, 223, 231
user access 62
User Options 161
general tab 162
passwords tab 162
user permissions 99, 101
user profiles 93
User Profiles
assigning specific job codes 98
employee access tab 96
general tab 95
information tab 49
job code access tab 98
passwords tab 100
permissions tab 99
user roles 101
assignment 101
creation 101
users 93
V
view hour edit history 22
view segment notes 21
viewing cumulative hours worked 61
W
WebClock 5, 38, 50, 53, 62, 100, 128, 134, 144, 148, 162, 173, 203-208, 210-213, 237
adding a request 211
break 206
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
278
change cost code 212
change job code 207, 213
clock in 204
manager override 204
missed punch 204
clock out 205
missed punch 205
logging in 203
navigating 203
performing quick clock operations 203
returning from break 206
view hours 208
view last punch 209
view messages 210
view requests 211
view schedules 210
Weekly Overall Schedule 186
options 186
weekly punch report 36
weekly schedule report 36
weekly summary 36
weighted overtime 179
welcome 5
© Data Management, Inc. All rights reserved. This documentation may change without notice. | Rev. 6/1/2015
279
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement